RXV 2067

Owner’s Manual
AV Receiver English for Asia, Africa, Oceania

and Latin America
SOURCE RECEIVER
BEFORE USE
About this manual Language selection Press iCursor B / C to select the favorite
1 2
AV
3 4 This procedure allows you to select the language of

4 language from the following options.
• Some features are not available in certain regions.
5 6 7 V-AUX menus and messages on the TV screen.
AUDIO • This manual is created prior to production. Design and
1 2 3 4
specifications are subject to change in part as a result
Press hON SCREEN to display the ON
PHONO
DOCK
MULTI
TUNER
USB
[A]
NET
[B]
of improvements, etc. In case of differences between
the manual and product, the product has priority.
1 SCREEN menu.
• “hON SCREEN” (example) indicates the name of

the parts on the remote control. Refer to the “Remote
control” (☞p. 12) for the information about each
position of the parts.
h • J1 indicates that the reference is in the footnote.
Refer to the corresponding numbers on the bottom of English (English), (Japanese),
ON SCREEN
the page. (French), (German), (Spanish),

• ☞ indicates the page describing the related (Russian)
ENTER
i
information.
• Click on the “ ” at the bottom of the page to
Press iCursor B / C to select “Setup” and
display the corresponding page in “Part names and
functions.”
2 press iENTER. 5 Press hON SCREEN to close the ON
SCREEN menu.
Front panel
Rear panel
Front panel display
Remote control
Supplied accessories
Check that you received all of the following parts.
• Remote control
Press iCursor D / E to select the
•
•
Simplified remote control
Batteries (AAA, R03, UM-4) x 4 3 “Language” and press iENTER.
• Power cable
• YPAO microphone
• AM loop antenna
• Indoor FM antenna
En 2
CONTENTS
INTRODUCTION Connecting audio/video recording devices .................... 37 FM/AM tuning ................................................................. 62
Connecting to the network ............................................. 37 Selecting a frequency for reception (Normal tuning) .... 62
Features and capabilities ................................................... 5 Connecting a USB storage device .................................. 38 Navigating the FM/AM tuner
Connecting the FM/AM antennas .................................. 39 from the content window ............................................... 64
Using the TV OSD to operate the unit ............................. 6
Basic OSD menu operations............................................. 6 Playing back tunes on the PC......................................... 66
Setting up the speaker parameters automatically
Viewing or modifying content for the current input source (YPAO).............................................................................. 40 Windows Media Player setup......................................... 66
<Content window> ........................................................... 6 Playback of PC music contents...................................... 66
Configuring settings for this unit PLAYBACK Playing back tunes on the USB storage devices............ 68
<ON SCREEN menu>...................................................... 6 Playback of the USB storage device .............................. 68
Adjust settings for each input source <Option menu> ..... 7 Basic playback procedure ............................................... 47
Listening to the Internet Radio ...................................... 70
Part names and functions.................................................. 8 Changing input settings with a single key Listening to Internet Radio ............................................ 70
Front panel........................................................................ 8 (SCENE function) ............................................................ 49
Front panel with the cover opened ................................... 9 Using shortcut function................................................... 72
Selecting a SCENE suited to an external component .... 49
Rear panel....................................................................... 10 Playing back tunes from your iPod™/iPhone™ ........... 73
Front panel display ......................................................... 11 Enjoying favorite sound field effect ............................... 50
Connecting the Universal Dock for iPod ....................... 73
Remote control ............................................................... 12 Selecting sound programs and sound decoders.............. 50
Controlling an iPod™/iPhone™ .................................... 73
Remote control with the cover open............................... 13 Enjoying surround sound
Playing iPod™/iPhone™ from the menu screen
On-screen display ........................................................... 14 with the CINEMA DSP function ................................... 50
(Menu browse control)................................................... 74
Enjoying unprocessed playback
Operating basic playback functions
CONNECTIONS (Straight decoding mode) ............................................... 51
via the remote control (Simple remote control) ............. 75
Enjoying Hi-Fi Sound Quality (Pure Direct Mode) ....... 52
Playing iPod™/iPhone™ with wireless connection ...... 75
Connecting speakers ........................................................ 15 Enjoying stereo playback ............................................... 52
Enjoying compressed music source with better sound Playing back tunes from Bluetooth™ components ...... 77
Speaker channels and functions...................................... 15
quality (Compressed Music Enhancer) .......................... 52 Connecting a Yamaha Bluetooth
Speaker layout ................................................................ 16 Wireless Audio Receiver................................................ 77
Sound programs.............................................................. 53
Connecting speakers and subwoofers............................. 20 Pairing Bluetooth™ components ................................... 77
Using the TV display to control this unit....................... 55
Advanced speaker configuration .................................... 23 Using Bluetooth™ components ..................................... 78
Basic operations via the TV screen display ................... 55
Speaker layout utilizing an external power amplifier..... 23 Controlling this unit by using the web browser
Connecting an external amplifier ................................... 25 Configuring settings specific to an individual input
(Web Control Center)...................................................... 79
source (Option menu) ...................................................... 57
Connecting external components.................................... 26 Displaying and operating Web Control Center .............. 79
Option menu display and setup ...................................... 57
Jacks and cables.............................................................. 26
Option menu................................................................... 58
Connecting a TV monitor............................................... 27
Connecting BD/DVD players and other devices ............ 30 Confirming and operating input sources
Connecting game consoles or video camcorders............ 35 from the content window................................................. 61
Connecting a multi-format player Displaying the content window on the TV screen ......... 61
or an external decoder .................................................... 35 Switching the display between the Now Playing view
Connecting a SCENE link and the Browse view ...................................................... 61
playback-compatible device ........................................... 36
Using the Trigger function to link
external component power.............................................. 36
En 3
SETUP Controlling the remote control APPENDIX
to operate various functions.......................................... 111
Configuring input sources (Input menu) ....................... 81 Keys connecting external components ......................... 111 Troubleshooting ............................................................. 132
Configuring input sources .............................................. 81 Customizing the remote control ................................... 112 General ......................................................................... 132
Input menu...................................................................... 82 Setting remote control codes ........................................ 112 HDMI™ ....................................................................... 134
Programming from other remote controls.................... 114 Tuner (FM/AM) ........................................................... 135
Editing the SCENE function (Scene menu) ................... 84
Changing source names in the display window ........... 116 USB and Network ........................................................ 136
Editing a scene................................................................ 84
Macro programming features ....................................... 117 iPod™/iPhone™ .......................................................... 137
Scene menu..................................................................... 85
Clearing configurations ................................................ 118 Bluetooth™ .................................................................. 138
Simple registering as the SCENE................................... 86
Simplified remote control............................................. 120 Remote control............................................................. 138
Setting sound program parameters
Extended functionality that can be configured Glossary .......................................................................... 139
(Sound Program menu) ................................................... 87
as needed (Advanced Setup menu)............................... 121 Audio information........................................................ 139
Editing sound programs.................................................. 87
Displaying/Setting the Advanced Setup menu............. 121 Sound program information ......................................... 140
CINEMA DSP parameters ............................................. 88
Setting the impedance of speakers .............................. 121 Video information ........................................................ 141
Parameters usable in certain sound programs ................ 90
Remote sensor .............................................................. 121 Compatibility of the input and output video signals .... 141
Parameters usable in surround decoder .......................... 91
Avoiding crossing remote control signals
Information on HDMI™............................................... 142
Setting various functions (Setup menu) ......................... 92 when using multiple Yamaha receivers ........................ 122
Operating the Setup menu .............................................. 92 Changing FM/AM frequency steps About trademarks ......................................................... 143
Setup menu ..................................................................... 93 (Asia and General models only)................................... 122
Specifications.................................................................. 144
Manages settings for speakers ........................................ 93 Changing TV format .................................................... 122
Setting the audio output function of this unit ................. 97 Removing HDMI video output up-scaling limits......... 123 Index ............................................................................... 146
Setting this unit’s video output function......................... 99 Recovery and backup of the system settings................ 123
Setting HDMI functions ............................................... 100 Initializing various settings for this unit....................... 123
Adjusting this unit’s network parameters ..................... 103 Firmware update........................................................... 124
Setting this unit’s multi-zone function ......................... 104 Firmware version.......................................................... 124
Making the receiver easier to use ................................. 105 Using the HDMI Control function ............................... 125
Language ...................................................................... 108
Enjoying the contents in another room ....................... 129
Confirming information of this unit Connecting Zone2 or Zone3......................................... 129
(Information menu) ....................................................... 109 Controlling Zone2 or Zone3......................................... 131
Selecting information ................................................... 109 Enjoying the music in all rooms................................... 131
En 4
INTRODUCTION
Features and capabilities
■ Built-in high-quality, high-power 7-channel amplifier ■ Playback of music on the USB storage devices ................................................... 68
■ Multi-channel speaker configuration capability ■ Sophisticated on-screen display (OSD) for easy operation
– 2- to 7.1-channel speaker configurations .................................................................................................16 – Selection of input sources, scenes, and sound programs .........................................................................55
– Presence speaker connections for playback with a richer sound field effect...........................................15 – Navigation for the current input source (content window) ......................................................................61
– Bi-amplification connections for high-quality playback .........................................................................21 – Setup for this unit (ON SCREEN menu) .................................................................................................81
– External amplifier connections for high-quality playback and expansion of channels ...........................23 – Setup for each input source (Option menu) .............................................................................................57
– Speaker impedance configuration............................................................................................................21
Most of functions can be operated with on-screen display on the TV screen. Refer to “Using the TV
■ HDMI compatibility OSD to operate the unit” on the following pages for information on functions that can be controlled
– 8 HDMI input jacks (7 on the rear, 1 on the front) supporting 3D video signal input ............................30 using the on-screen display.
– 2 selectable HDMI output jacks supporting Audio Return Channel and 3D video signal ......................28
■ Automatic setup for speaker acoustic parameters ■ Customizable remote control

(YPAO - Yamaha Parametric Room Acoustic Optimizer) ......................................40 – Remote control code setup for operation of external components ........................................................112
– Learning function from other remote controls.......................................................................................114
■ Extensive inputs (max. 13) for external playback components
– BD/DVD/CD player connection ..............................................................................................................30 – Programming macro for a series of operations......................................................................................117
– Game console / video camcorder connection ..........................................................................................35 ■ Multi-room listening capability (Zone2/Zone3) ................................................... 129
– Multi-format player / external decoder connection .................................................................................35
– iPod/iPhone wired connection .................................................................................................................73
– iPod/iPhone wireless connection .............................................................................................................75
– Bluetooth component connection ............................................................................................................77
■ 1-button input/sound program/setting switching (SCENE function) ...................49

■ Built-in sound programs and surround decoders for playback variety of sources
– Spatial sound playback with sound field effects (CINEMA DSP) ..........................................................50
– Playback with no sound field effects (straight decoding) ........................................................................51
– High-fidelity sound playback (Pure Direct).............................................................................................52
– Enhanced sound playback for compressed sources (Compressed Music Enhancer)...............................52
■ Tuner playback
– FM/AM broadcast....................................................................................................................................62
– (Asia and General models only) Changing FM/AM frequency steps .....................................................62
■ Playback and control via network

– Playback of music on the PC and DLNA server......................................................................................66
– Internet radio service playback ................................................................................................................70
– Control this unit via network (Web Browser Control).............................................................................79
En 5
INTRODUCTION
Using the TV OSD to operate the unit
This unit features a sophisticated on-screen display (OSD) for the TV screen. The OSD is designed to enable visual guidance that simplifies operations. The OSD mainly displays the ON SCREEN and
Option menus, as well as the content window that displays the content of current input sources.
Basic OSD menu operations Configuring settings for this unit <ON SCREEN menu>
■ Select an input source, scene and sound program ■ Configure an input source
– Select an input source ..............................................................................................................................55 – Change the input source name <Rename/Icon Select> ...........................................................................82
– Select a scene ...........................................................................................................................................55 – Specify a format for digital audio signals <Decoder Mode> ..................................................................83
– Select a sound program............................................................................................................................56 – Enhance the sound of compressed audio <Enhancer> ............................................................................83
– Output a video signal input from another input source
■ Select a language
while playing a multi-channel audio signal <Video Out> .......................................................................83
– Change the language displayed on the TV screen <Language> ............................................................108
– Charge the iPod/iPhone when this unit is in standby mode <Standby Charge>......................................83
– Play music sources on a PC using external controls <DMC Control>....................................................83
Viewing or modifying content for the current input source
■ Customize a scene
<Content window> – Register or clear settings for a selected scene <Save>, <Load>, <Reset> ........................................85, 86
– Turn on a Yamaha BD/DVD player or CD player connected to this unit automatically
■ Operate the FM/AM tuner when a scene is selected <SCENE IR> ...................................................................................................85
– Display preset stations for selection ........................................................................................................64 – Changing a scene name and icon <Rename/Icon Select> .......................................................................86
– Display information on the station currently received.............................................................................64
– Perform operations such as searching for and registering stations using the screen button ....................64
■ Adjust a sound program (sound program)
– Adjust sound program parameters ...........................................................................................................87
■ Operate the Internet radio
– Display information on the station currently received.............................................................................70
■ Display settings information for this unit
– Display audio signal information <Audio Signal>................................................................................109
– Play back radio contents ..........................................................................................................................70
– Display video signal information <Video Signal> ................................................................................109
– Bookmark Internet radio stations.............................................................................................................70
– Display HDMI signal information <HDMI Monitor>...........................................................................109
■ Operate the iPod music sources – Display network information <Network>..............................................................................................110
– Display the list of iPod music sources for selection ................................................................................74 – Display system information <System>..................................................................................................110
– Perform operations such as play, stop and pause using the TV screen <Menu browse control> ............74 – Display Zone information <Zone> ........................................................................................................110
Continues to the
next page
En 6
INTRODUCTIONUsing the TV OSD to operate the unit
■ Adjust acoustic parameters to match your speakers and listening environment ■ Specify other functions for this unit
– Specify speaker acoustic parameters automatically – Enter standby mode automatically when no operations are performed <Auto Power Down> .............106
(Yamaha Parametric Room Acoustic Optimizer - YPAO).......................................................................40 – Assign jacks to the selected input source <Input Assignment> ............................................................106
– Set up this unit’s speaker configuration simply <Power Amp Assign> ..................................................94 – Adjust the brightness of the front panel display <Dimmer> .................................................................107
– Specify settings for each speaker <Configuration> .................................................................................94 – Change the wall paper displayed on the TV screen <Wall Paper>........................................................107
– Control volume control for each speaker <Level> ..................................................................................96 – Specify the function of the TRIGGER OUT jack for controlling external components
– Apply speaker distance settings <Distance> ...........................................................................................96 <Trigger Output1/Trigger Output2>......................................................................................................107
– Control equalizer sound quality <Parametric EQ>..................................................................................96 – Prohibit changes to settings <Memory Guard> .....................................................................................108
– Adjust test tone speaker <Test Tone> ......................................................................................................97
■ Adjust audio signals output from this unit Adjust settings for each input source <Option menu>
– Correct lag between audio and video signals <Lipsync> ........................................................................97
– Select a dynamic range adjustment method <Dynamic Range> .............................................................98 – Adjust bass and treble levels <Tone Control> .........................................................................................59
– Specify the maximum volume <Max Volume> .......................................................................................98 – Enable low-volume background music <Adaptive DRC> ......................................................................59
– Specify the initial volume <Initial Volume>............................................................................................98 – Enjoying more spatial sound fields <CINEMA DSP 3D Mode> ............................................................59
– Restrict video signal in Pure Direct Mode <Pure Direct Mode>.............................................................98 – Adjust the vertical position of dialogues <Dialogue Lift> ......................................................................59
– Adjust DSP effect and volume level <Adaptive DSP Level>..................................................................98 – Select the 5.1-channel signal playback method <Extended Surround> ..................................................59
– Adjust the volume of input sources <Volume Trim>...............................................................................60
■ Adjust video signals output from this unit
– Convert analog video signal to another type of signal <Analog to Analog Conversion> .......................99 – Selecting a video adjustment preset <Video Adjustment> ......................................................................60
– Specify the resolution and aspect ratio of video signals and adjust video quality <Processing>............99 – Selecting audio input jacks <Audio Select> ............................................................................................60
– Shuffle or repeat playback <Shuffle/Repeat>..........................................................................................60
■ HDMI settings – Connect / Disconnect Bluetooth component to this unit <Connect/Disconnect> ...................................60
– Assign the audio input source for the TV <TV Audio Input>...............................................................101
– Pairing Bluetooth component with this unit <Pairing> ...........................................................................60
– Listen to TV audio with HDMI cable connection <ARC (Audio Return Channel)>............................101
– Transmit HDMI audio/video to the TV during standby mode <Standby Through> .............................102
– Change the output destination of HDMI input audio signals <Audio Output>.....................................102
■ Network settings
– Specify this unit’s IP address <IP Address>..........................................................................................103
– Accept the commands over a LAN network when this unit is in the standby mode
<Network Standby> ...............................................................................................................................103
– Specify the mac address filter for this unit <MAC Address Filter> ......................................................103
■ Enable listening in multiple rooms (multi-zone function)

– Adjust Zone2/Zone3 volume <Zone2 Set/Zone3 Set> ..........................................................................104
– Display the Zone2/Zone3 menu on the TV <Monitor Out Assign>......................................................104
– Rename zones or scenes <Zone2 Scene Rename/Zone3 Scene Rename/Zone Rename>.....................105
En 7
INTRODUCTION
Part names and functions
Front panel c Front panel display

Displays information on this unit (☞p. 11). ■ Opening and closing the front panel door
d PURE DIRECT To use controls or jacks behind the front panel door, gently press
a MAIN ZONE A (Power) Switches this unit to Pure Direct Mode (☞p. 52). the bottom of the door to open it. Keep the door closed when not
Switches this unit between on and standby mode. e INPUT selector
b HDMI Through/iPod Charge indicator using controls or jacks behind the front panel door.
Selects an input source from which to playback. Rotate this selector to
Lights up in any of the following cases while the unit is in standby mode. cycle through the input sources in order.
• When the Standby Through function is enabled and audio/video from f VOLUME
an external component connected with HDMI is output to a TV Adjusts the volume level.
during standby mode (☞p. 102).
• When an iPod/iPhone, which is placed in the Universal Dock for iPod,
is charging while the unit is in standby mode (☞p. 83).
This indicator also lights up when the Yamaha Wireless System for
iPod is connected to this unit (☞p. 75).
a b c d
Continues to the
e f next page
En 8
INTRODUCTION Part names and functions
Front panel with the cover opened m MULTI ZONE r Cursor B / C / D / E, ENTER, RETURN
ZONE2 Cursor B / C / D / E Select menu items and change settings when
Switches to enable/disable the audio and video output to Zone2 menus, etc., are displayed.
g ON SCREEN (☞p. 104, p. 129). ENTER Confirms a selected item.
Turns on and off the ON SCREEN menu. ZONE3 RETURN Returns to the previous screen when menus are
h OPTION Switches to enable/disable the audio and video output to Zone3 displayed, or close the menu.
Turns on and off the Option menu (☞p. 57). (☞p. 104, p. 130). s USB port
i TONE/BALANCE ZONE CONTROLS
For connecting a USB memory device or portable USB audio player (☞p. 38).
Switches to Zone2 or Zone3 operation mode. This unit, or its remote
Adjusts high-frequency/low-frequency output of speakers/headphones t DISPLAY
in each zone (☞p. 48, p. 131). control, can be used to select input sources or adjust volume for an
external amplifier in another room or the built-in amplifier for speakers Switches the display between the Now Playing view and the Browse
Adjusts the balance of the volume of the left and right channels in view.
Zone2 or Zone3 (☞p. 131). in another room (☞p. 131).
n INFO u YPAO MIC jack
j STRAIGHT Connect the supplied YPAO microphone and adjust the speaker balance
Changes the information displayed on the front panel display (☞p. 11).
Changes a sound program to straight decoding mode (☞p. 51). automatically (☞p. 40).
o MEMORY
k PROGRAM l / h v PHONES jack
Registers FM/AM stations as preset stations (☞p. 63). J1
Selects a sound program (☞p. 50). Press the left or right key repeatedly For plugging headphones in. Sound effects applied during playback can
to cycle through sound programs. p FM/AM
Sets the FM/AM tuner band to FM or AM (☞p. 62). J1 also be heard through the headphones.
l SCENE w VIDEO AUX jacks
Switches the input source, the sound program, and the HDMI OUT with q PRESET j / i
Selects an FM/AM preset station (☞p. 63). J1 For connecting game consoles to this unit temporarily (☞p. 35).
a single button (☞p. 49, p. 84). When this unit is in standby mode, x TUNING/CH jj / ii
press this key to switch on.
Changes FM/AM tuner frequencies (☞p. 62). J1
g h i jk l mn o p q
rs
n t uv w x
JM
1 : Usable when you have selected TUNER input.
En 9
Rear panel h MONITOR OUT/ZONE OUT jacks (COMPONENT VIDEO o AV OUT jacks
jacks) For outputting audio/video signals received when analog inputs are
For connecting TV that are compatible with component video signals, selected (☞p. 37).
a PHONO jacks using three cables to output video signal (☞p. 28). p AUDIO1-4 jacks
For connecting a turntable (☞p. 34). i REMOTE IN/OUT1-2 jacks For connecting external components equipped with audio outputs to
b DOCK jack For connecting an external component that supports the remote receive audio signals (☞p. 34).
For connecting an optional Universal Dock for iPod (such as YDS- control function (☞p. 36). q MULTI CH INPUT jacks
12), Wireless System for iPod (YID-W10), or Bluetooth Wireless j TRIGGER OUT 1-2 jack For connecting a player that supports a multi-channel output
Audio Receiver (YBA-10) (☞p. 73, p. 75, p. 77). For connecting an external component that supports the trigger (☞p. 35).
c NETWORK port function to operate it linked with operation of this unit (☞p. 36). r ZONE OUT jacks
For connecting to a network (☞p. 37). k RS-232C terminal Outputs sound of this unit to an external amplifier set in a different
d HDMI OUT 1-2 jacks This is a control expansion terminal for custom installation. Consult room. (☞p. 129).
For connecting an HDMI - compatible TV to output audio/video your dealer for details. s PRE OUT terminals
signals (☞p. 28). l VOLTAGE SELECTOR For connecting a subwoofer with built-in amplifier or an external
e MON.OUT/ZONE OUT jacks (S-VIDEO/VIDEO jacks) (General model only) power amplifier (☞p. 22, p. 25).
For connecting a TV capable of receiving video input, and outputting Select the switch position according to your local voltage (Refer to t SPEAKERS terminals
video signals to it (☞p. 28, p. 29). Quick Reference Guide). For connecting the front, center, surround and surround back speakers
f COMPONENT VIDEO jacks m AV1-4 jacks (☞p. 20). Connect the presence speakers (☞p. 20) or the speakers for
For connecting external components that support component video For connecting to external components equipped with audio/video Zone2 and Zone3 (☞p. 21) to the EXTRA SP jacks.
output for video signal reception (☞p. 31). outputs to receive audio/video signals (☞p. 31). u AC IN
g HDMI input jacks n ANTENNA jacks For connecting the supplied power cable.
For connecting external components equipped with HDMI- For connecting AM and FM antennas (☞p. 39).
compatible outputs to receive audio/video signals (☞p. 30).
a b c de f g h i j k l
Distinguishing the input and output jacks
DOCK NETWORK HDMI RS-232C
The area around the audio/video output jacks is marked
HDMI OUT
1
ARC
2
SELECTABLE ARC
AV 1
(1 BD/DVD)
AV 2 AV 3 AV 4 AV 5 AV 6 AV 7
in white to prevent connection errors. Use these jacks to
AV 1
(1 BD/DVD)
AV 2 AV 3 AV 4
AV OUT MON.OUT/ZONE OUT Y PB
COMPONENT VIDEO
PR Y AV 3 PB PR
TRIGGER
OUT
output audio/video signals to a TV or other external
C
PHONO
AV 1
A MONITOR OUT/ZONE OUT
1
REMOTE
2
1 component.
Y PB PR IN OUT IN OUT
GND
AV 2
2
B
HDMI
AV 4 D +12V 0.1A MAX. HDMI OUT
1 2 AV 1 AV 2 AV 3 AV 4 AV 5 AV 6 AV 7
AUDIO 1 AUDIO 2 AUDIO 3 AUDIO 4 MULTI CH INPUT ARC SELECTABLE ARC (1 BD/DVD)
(2 TV) (3 CD) CENTER ZONE OUT PRE OUT (SINGLE) (FRONT)
1
COMPONENT VIDEO TRIGGER
AV OUT MON.OUT/ZONE OUT Y PB PR Y AV 3 PB C PR OUT
AV 1
1
A REMOTE
1 2
2 Y PB PR IN OUT IN OUT
AV 2
2
B
AV 4 D +12V 0.1A MA
FRONT/ (REAR) AUDIO 1 AUDIO 2 AUDIO 3 AUDIO 4 MULTI CH INPUT
FRONT SURROUND SUR. BACK SUBWOOFER ZONE 2 ZONE 3 SURROUND SUR. BACK CENTER ZONE OUT PRE OUT
a COAXIAL b COAXIAL c OPTICAL d OPTICAL e OPTICAL f COAXIAL F. PRESENCE SUBWOOFER (2 TV) (3 CD) CENTER (SINGLE) (FRONT)
1
SPEAKERS
ZONE2/ZONE3 SURROUND SURROUND BACK/ CENTER FRONT ZONE2/ZONE3/ AC IN
BI-AMP F.PRESENCE 2
FRONT SURROUND SUR. BACK SUBWOOFER ZONE 2 ZONE 3 SURROUND SUR. BACK CENTER
CAL e OPTICAL f COAXIAL
SPEAKERS
ANTENNA ZONE2/ZONE3 SURROUND SURROUND BACK/ CENTER FRONT
BI-AMP
FM (4 RADIO)GND AM
75
EXTRA SP2 SINGLE EXTRA SP1

EXTRA SP2 SINGLE
Output jacks
m n o p q r s t u
En 10
Front panel display i CINEMA DSP indicator n ADAPTIVE DRC indicator

Lights up when a sound field effect that uses CINEMA DSP Lights when the adaptive dynamic range control feature is tuned on
technology is selected. (☞p. 59).
a Tuner indicator j CINEMA DSP 3D indicator
Light up according to the status of a received station (☞p. 62). Lights up when CINEMA DSP 3D is activated (☞p. 51). ■ Switching information on the front panel display
b ZONE2/ZONE3 indicator k Cursor indicators The front panel can display sound programs and surround
Lights up when the audio or video output to Zone2 or Zone3 is Light up if corresponding cursors on the remote control are available decoder names as well as the active input source.
enabled (☞p. 131). for operations. Press tINFO repeatedly to cycle through displayed
c SLEEP indicator l MUTE indicator
Blinks when the sleep timer is on (☞p. 13, p. 131). informations. J2
Blinks when audio is muted.
d PARTY indicator m Speaker indicators Input source name
Lights up when the party mode is active (☞p. 104). Indicate speaker terminals from which signals are output.
e Multi information display
Center speaker
Displays a range of information on menu items and settings.
Subwoofer 1 Subwoofer 2
AV1 VOLUME
f VOLUME indicator
Displays the current volume level.
Front L speaker Front R speaker Standard
g HDMI indicator Presence L speaker Presence R speaker
Lights up during normal HDMI communication. Sound program (DSP program)
Surround L speaker Surround R speaker
IN indicator
Lights up when this unit detects the external component connected to
the HDMI input jack (☞p. 30). Surround back L Surround back R
speaker speaker
OUT 1/OUT 2 indicators Surround back
Indicate which HDMI OUT jack outputs audio/video signals (☞p. 28). speaker J1
h ENHANCER indicator
Lights up when the Compressed Music Enhancer is active (☞p. 52).
a b c d e f
STEREO TUNED PARTY MUTE VOLUME

ADAPTIVE DRC
ENHANCER SLEEP
gh i j k lk m n
J 1 : “SB” is displayed when using a 6.1-channel configuration only.

J 2 : During FM/AM reception, the frequency is displayed instead of the input source.
En 11
Remote control a Remote control signal transmitter i Cursor B / C / D / E, ENTER, RETURN

Transmits infrared signals. Cursor B / C / D / E Select menu items and change settings when
b SOURCE A (SOURCE Power) menus, etc., are displayed.
Switches an external component on and off. ENTER Confirms a selected item.
a RETURN Returns to the previous screen when menus are
c Display window
Displays remote control information. displayed, or close the menu.
SOURCE RECEIVER
b l d Input selector j PRESET F / G

m Select an input source on this unit from which to playback. Selects a preset station when the FM/AM tuner is operated.
c AV1-7 AV1-7 jacks k TV control keys
V-AUX Front panel VIDEO AUX jacks Operate a monitor such as a TV.
AV
1 2 3 4 AUDIO1-4 AUDIO1-4 jacks l RECEIVER A (RECEIVER Power)

PHONO PHONO jacks Switches this unit between on and standby mode.
5 6 7 V-AUX
MULTI MULTI CH INPUT jacks
AUDIO m SOURCE/RECEIVER
d 1 2 3 4
USB A USB storage device connected to the USB port.
Switches remote control key function to operate this unit or an
NET Internet radio, a USB connected to the USB port,
PHONO MULTI USB NET external component (☞p. 111). Operate an external component when
or a PC connected to the NETWORK port.
this key glows green, or this unit when this key glows orange.
DOCK TUNER [A] [B] DOCK A Universal Dock for iPod, Wireless System for
iPod, or Bluetooth Wireless Audio Receiver n VOLUME +/-
SCENE
e 1 2 3 4 connected to the DOCK jack. Adjust the volume level (☞p. 47).
TUNER FM/AM tuner o MUTE
[A]/[B] Changes the external component to operate with Turns the mute function of the sound output on and off (☞p. 47).
the gExternal component operation keys
f PROGRAM MUTE VOLUME n p OPTION
without changing inputs. J1
Turns on and off the Option menu (☞p. 57).
o e SCENE q DISPLAY
g TOP MENU POP-UP/MENU Switch the input source and the sound program with a single button
Switches the display between the Now Playing view and the Browse
(☞p. 49). When this unit is in standby mode, press this key to switch
h ON SCREEN OPTION p view.
on.
r Sound selection keys
f PROGRAM k / n
i ENTER Switch between the current sound field effect (sound program) and the
Selects a sound program (☞p. 50). Press the up or down key
surround decoder (☞p. 50).
repeatedly to cycle through sound programs.
RETURN DISPLAY q
g External component operation keys
Operate recording, playback, and menu displays etc. for external
REC components (☞p. 111). J1
g h ON SCREEN
Turns on and off the ON SCREEN menu.
CLASSICAL LIVE ENTERTAIN
CLUB
j PRESET
MOVIE STEREO STRAIGHT

r
TV
PURE
INPUT DIRECT
k TV VOL TV CH
MUTE
J 1 : You can use gExternal component operation keys for each input source to operate registered components. Remote control codes must be registered for each input
in advance if you want to operate external components (☞p. 113).
En 12
Remote control with the cover open s Sound selection keys

Switch between the current sound field effect (sound program) and the ■ Installing batteries in the remote control
surround decoder (☞p. 50). When inserting batteries in the remote control, remove the
t INFO battery compartment cover from the reverse side of the remote
SOURCE RECEIVER
Cycles the information displayed on the front panel display (the name control, and insert four AAA batteries into the battery
of the currently selected input source, the sound program, the
compartment so that they match with the polarity markings (+
surround decoder, the FM/AM tuner frequency, etc.).
and -).
u Numeric keys
AV Enter numbers.
1 2 3 4
v PARTY
Switches the party mode on and off (☞p. 131).
Battery compartment a c
5 6 7 V-AUX cover
1 2
AUDIO
3 4
w HDMI OUT
Switches the output jack connected to an HDMI compatible TV
PHONO MULTI USB NET
(☞p. 47).
DOCK TUNER [A] [B] x Radio control keys
SCENE
Operates the FM/AM tuner. These keys are used when using the tuner b
1 2 3 4 input.
MEMORY Presets radio stations.
FM Sets the FM/AM tuner band to FM.
PROGRAM MUTE VOLUME AM Sets the FM/AM tuner band to AM. Battery compartment
TUN./CH H / I Changes tuning frequencies.
y SLEEP Replace the batteries with new ones if the remote control can
TOP MENU POP-UP/MENU Switches this unit to standby mode automatically after a specified
only be operated within a narrow range.
period of time has elapsed (sleep timer). Press this key repeatedly to
ON SCREEN OPTION
set the time for the sleep timer function.
ENTER 120min. 90min. NOTE

If there are remote control codes for external components
Off 30min. 60min. registered to the remote control, removing the batteries for more
RETURN DISPLAY
The SLEEP indicator lights up when the sleep timer is on. than 2 minutes, or leaving exhausted batteries in the remote
v z LEVEL control, may clear the remote control codes. If this should occur,
s SUR.
DECODE ENHANCER PARTY HDMI OUT
w Adjusts the output level for each speaker (☞p. 96). replace the batteries with new ones, and set the remote control
t INFO MEMORY FM AM
A SETUP codes.
1 2 3 x Setup this remote control (☞p. 112).
TUN./CH
B ZONE
4 5 6
Switches the zone to be operated by the remote control between the
u
7 8 9 SLEEP
y Main zone, Zone2, and Zone3 (☞p. 131).
10 0 ENT LEVEL
z
ZONE SETUP
A
B
En 13
On-screen display
When a TV is connected to this unit, the supplied remote control can be used to specify and verify this
unit’s settings via menus and options displayed on the TV screen.
The following displays are available in the on-screen display.

ON SCREEN menu Content window
Press hON SCREEN to display the ON Press dInput selector to display the content
SCREEN menu. window.
Detailed settings for this unit can be Includes the Browse view and the Now
configured. Use this menu to select desired Playing view. The Now Playing view displays
settings, change their values, or check the the status of the source from which music is
current status of this unit. currently played back. Adjust settings for
Refer to “SETUP” (☞p. 81) for details. music content from the Browse view.
Refer to “Confirming and operating input
sources from the content window” (☞p. 61)
for details.
Option menu
Press pOPTION to display the Option menu.
Configure the optional settings for each input

source. Settings such as “Tone Control” and
“Volume Trim” are applied to this unit
regardless of the input source.
Refer to “Configuring settings specific to an
individual input source (Option menu)”
(☞p. 57) for details.
En 14
CONNECTIONS
Connecting speakers
This unit uses acoustic field effects and sound decoders to bring you the impact of a real movie theater or concert hall. These effects will be brought to you with ideal speaker positioning and
connections in your listening environment.
Speaker channels and functions ■ Surround left and right speakers ■ Surround back left and right speakers
The surround speakers are for effect and vocal sounds while The surround back speakers are for rear effect sounds while
playing back more than 5.1-channel source. When used with no playing back more than 6.1-channel source. When used with only
■ Front left and right speakers surround back speaker while playing back more than 6.1-channel one surround back speaker while playing back more than 7.1-
The front speakers are used for the front channel sounds (stereo source (including surround back channel), sound of surround back channel source, sound of the left and right surround back channel is
sound) and effect sounds. channel is distributed between the left and right surround speakers. mixed and output from a single speaker.
E.g.
E.g.
E.g.
Surround speaker layout: Surround back speaker layout:
When used with 7.1ch sound, arrange the left and right speakers
Place the speakers at the rear of the room on the left and right sides
Front speaker layout: towards the listening position, to the rear of the listening position.
facing the listening position. They should be placed between 60
Place these speakers at an equal distance from the ideal listening Arrange the left and right speakers at least 30 cm apart. The same
degrees and 80 degrees from the listening position and with the separation as with the front left and right speakers is optimum.
position in the front of the room. When using a projector screen,
speaker tops at a height of 1.5 – 1.8 m from the floor. When used with 6.1ch sound, arrange these to the rear of the
the appropriate top positions of the speakers are about 1/4 of the
listening position.
screen from the bottom. ■ Presence left and right speakers
■ Center speaker The presence speakers are used for front effect sounds. When used ■ Subwoofer
in combination with the sound programs (☞p. 53), a sound with a The subwoofer speaker is used for bass sounds and low-frequency
The center speaker is for the center channel sounds (dialogue,
richer and more spatial presence is possible. effect (LFE) sounds included in Dolby Digital and DTS. Use a
vocals, etc.).
subwoofer that is equipped with built-in amplifier.
E.g.
E.g.
Center speaker layout:
Place it halfway between the left and right front speakers. When Presence speaker layout:
using a TV, place the speaker just above or just under the center of E.g.
Place the left and right presence speakers 0.5 – 1 m to the outside
the TV with the front surfaces of the TV and the speaker aligned. of the left and right front speakers respectively. The tops of the
When using a screen, place it just under the center of the screen. presence speakers should be 1.8 m above the floor. Subwoofer speaker layout:
Place it to the outside of the front left and right speakers facing
slightly inward to reduce echoes from the wall. You can use one or
two subwoofers and select the position of subwoofers from “Left +
Right,” “Front + Rear” and “Monaural x2” (☞p. 95).
En 15
CONNECTIONS Connecting speakers
Speaker layout ■ Enjoying the 7.1 channel audio source

■ 7.1-channel speaker layout (7 speakers + subwoofer)
In addition to the 7.1-channel speaker layout, a variety of speaker configurations can be specified with
Front R speaker
presence speaker connection, bi-amp connection or the Zone2/Zone3 function.
Subwoofer
In addition, this unit is equipped with the “Power Amp Assign” function, which can be used to easily Front L speaker
apply the appropriate speaker settings to this unit according to speaker configuration. Surround R
speaker
■ Connection of speakers
Connect the speakers to the appropriate jacks shown in the table for each speaker layout. Refer to
“Connecting speakers and subwoofers” (☞p. 20) for details on connecting speakers.
You can also use two subwoofers by connecting them to both SUBWOOFER1 (FRONT) and
SUBWOOFER2 (REAR) jacks. And, you can use the EXTRA SP1 jacks for Zone3 speakers and
EXTRA SP2 jacks for Zone2 by setting the assignment with “Power Amp Assign” (☞p. 94).
Center speaker
■ Assigning a speaker configuration
A speaker configuration must be assigned to this unit to activate the speakers. Use the Power Amp 30 cm
Surround L speaker or more
Assign function to apply the appropriate settings shown in the table for each speaker layout. Refer to
“Power Amp Assign” (☞p. 94) for details on setting. Surround back L speaker J1 Surround back R speaker
Audio from a 7.1-channel audio source can be played back with no degradation with this speaker
configuration.
■ Connections of speakers
FRONT jacks Front L/R speakers SURROUND Surround back L/R speakers
BACK jacks
CENTER jack Center speaker SUBWOOFER Subwoofer

(PRE OUT) jack
SURROUND jacks Surround L/R speakers
Power Amp Assign 7ch Normal (Default)
J 1 : The sound of surround back channel can also be output from a single surround back speaker. When only one surround back
speaker is used, connect it to the SURROUND BACK L (SINGLE) jack and place it directly behind the listening position.
En 16
■ Adding the presence speakers for a richer sound field effect ■ Enjoying the audio source without surround back speakers
■ Presence speaker layout (7 speakers + subwoofer + presence speakers) ■ 5.1-channel speaker layout (5 speakers + subwoofer)
Front R speaker
Presence R speaker Front R speaker
Front L
Subwoofer
speaker Subwoofer Front L speaker
Presence
L speaker Surround R Surround R
speaker speaker
Center speaker Center speaker

Surround back
R speaker
Surround L speaker 30 cm Surround L speaker
or more
Surround back L speaker J1
This unit can mix 7.1-channel audio source down to 5.1-channel sound. This enables 7.1-channel
This unit automatically selects the presence speakers or surround back speakers to output sounds sound without surround back speakers.
according to the selected sound program.
When the sound program is changed, the speakers that output the sound are switched between the ■ Connections of speakers
presence speakers and surround back speakers automatically. J2
FRONT jacks Front L/R speakers SURROUND jacks Surround L/R speakers
(PRE OUT) jack
FRONT jacks Front L/R speakers SURROUND Surround back L/R speakers
BACK jacks
(PRE OUT) jack
SURROUND jacks Surround L/R speakers EXTRA SP1 jacks Presence L/R speakers
J 2 : Sound cannot be output from the surround back speakers when it is output from the speakers connected to the EXTRA SP1
jacks.
En 17
■ Using the front speakers that support bi-amp connections for a ■ Using speakers in two rooms (Zone2 function)
high quality sound ■ 7.1-channel speaker layout + Zone2 (7 speakers (in main zone) + subwoofer (in
■ 5.1-channel speaker layout (Front speakers (Bi-amp) + 3 speakers) main zone) + front speakers (in secondary zone))
Front R speaker Main zone Zone2
(Bi-amp connection)
Front R speaker Subwoofer
Front L speaker Subwoofer
(Bi-amp connection) Front L speaker Front R speaker
Surround R
speaker Surround R speaker
Center speaker Front L speaker

Center speaker
30 cm
Surround L speaker
Surround back R
Surround back L speaker J1 speaker
Using the front speakers that support bi-amp connections reproduces a high quality sound.
In addition to the main room, speakers in another room can also be controlled.
When the built-in amplifier assigned to speakers in another room is turned on, sound output
automatically switches from the surround back speakers to the speakers in the other room. J2
FRONT jacks Front L/R speakers (bi-amp) SURROUND Front L/R speakers (bi-amp)
BACK jacks
(PRE OUT) jack FRONT jacks Front L/R speakers SURROUND Surround back L/R speakers
BACK jacks
(PRE OUT) jack
SURROUND jacks Surround L/R speakers EXTRA SP1 Zone2 speakers
Power Amp Assign 5ch BI-AMP jacks J3
Power Amp Assign 7ch + 1ZONE
jacks.
J 3 : EXTRA SP1 jacks can also be assigned to the Zone3 speakers with “Power Amp Assign” (☞p. 94).
En 18
■ Using speakers in three rooms (Zone2 and Zone3 functions) ■ Connections of speakers
■ 7.1-channel speaker layout + Zone2 + Zone3 (7 speakers (in main zone) + FRONT jacks Front L/R speakers SUBWOOFER Subwoofer
subwoofer (in main zone) + front speakers (in secondary and tertiary zones)) (PRE OUT) jack
Main zone Zone2 Front R CENTER jack Center speaker EXTRA SP1 Zone2 speakers
speaker
jacks J4
Front R speaker
SURROUND jacks Surround L/R speakers EXTRA SP2 Zone3 speakers
Subwoofer
Front L speaker jacks J5
Surround R SURROUND Surround back L/R speakers
speaker
BACK jacks
Front L speaker
Zone3 Front R
speaker Power Amp Assign 7ch + 2ZONE
Center speaker
Surround back
30 cm R speaker
Front L speaker
Surround back L speaker J1
In addition to the main room, speakers in other two rooms can also be controlled.
When the built-in amplifier assigned to speakers in another room is turned on, sound output
automatically switches from the surround back and/or surround speakers to the speakers in the other
rooms. J2, J3
J 1 : The sound of surround back channel can also be output from a single surround back speaker. When only one surround back J 4 : EXTRA SP1 jacks can also be assigned to the Zone3 speakers with “Power Amp Assign” (☞p. 94).
speaker is used, connect it to the SURROUND BACK L (SINGLE) jack and place it directly behind the listening position. J 5 : EXTRA SP2 jacks can also be assigned to the Zone2 speakers with “Power Amp Assign” (☞p. 94).
jacks.
J 3 : Sound cannot be output from the surround speakers when it is output from the speakers connected to the EXTRA SP2 jacks.
En 19
Connecting speakers and subwoofers

Connect your speakers to their respective terminals on the rear panel.
CAUTION
• Remove the power cable of this unit from the power outlet before connecting the speakers.
• Generally speaker cables consist of two parallel insulated cables. One of these cables is a different color, or has a line running along it, to indicate different polarity. Insert the different colored (or lined) cable into the “+”
(positive, red) terminal on this unit and the speakers, and the other cable into the “–” (negative, black) terminal.
• Be careful that the core of the speaker cable does not touch anything or come into contact with the metal areas of this unit. This may damage this unit or the speakers. If the speaker cables short circuit, “CHECK SP
WIRES!” will appear on the front panel display when this unit is switched on.
■ Front/Center/Surround/Surround back speaker and ■ Presence speaker connection The presence speakers (PL/PR) that output front effect sounds can
Subwoofer connection When using the presence speakers, connect the speakers to the be connected to this unit. With the sound programs (☞p. 57),
When connecting only one surround back speaker, connect the EXTRA SP1 jacks as shown in the diagram below. sound with a richer and more spatial presence can be created.
speaker to the SURROUND BACK L (SINGLE) jacks.
Presence speaker
Subwoofer Front speaker R L 0.5 – 1 m 0.5 – 1 m
R L
PL PR
1.8 m L R 1.8 m
HDMI RS-232C RS-232C

AV 6 AV 7
DVD)
TRIGGER
OMPONENT VIDEO TRIGGER
PR Y AV 3 PB C PR OUT
1 REMOTE
OUT
1
Connection of presence speakers is recommended to take full
MONITOR OUT/ZONE OUT REMOTE 1 2
1 2
2
IN OUT IN OUT
2
advantage of the effects of CINEMA DSP sound programs.
D +12V 0.1A MAX.
AV 4 +12V 0.1A MAX.
MULTI CH INPUT SINGLE) (FRONT)
CENTER ZONE OUT PRE OUT (SINGLE) (FRONT) 1
1
2 2
URROUND SUR. BACK SUBWOOFER ZONE 2 ZONE 3

FRONT/
F. PRESENCE SURROUND SUR. BACK
((REAR))
SUBWOOFER CENTER
UR. BACK
((REAR))
SUBWOOFER CENTER
Continues to the
AC IN
next page
CENTER FRONT ZONE2/ZONE3/
SURROUND SURROUND BACK/ CENTER FRONT ZONE2/ZON F.PRESENCE
BI-AMP F.PRESEN
EXTRA SP1
SINGLE EXTRA SP1
R L R L
Surround Surround back Center speaker
speaker speaker
En 20
■ Bi-amp connection ■ Multi-zone audio system using the internal ■ Changing speaker impedance
This unit can be connected to speakers that support bi-amp amplifier of this unit This unit is configured for 8 Ω speakers at factory setting.
connections. When connecting speakers, connect the FRONT jacks Connect the speakers in the second zone and the third zone to the When connecting to 6 Ω speakers, carry out the following
and the SURROUND BACK/BI-AMP jacks as in the diagram EXTRA SP1/EXTRA SP2 jacks as in the diagram below. procedure to switch to 6 Ω. When this unit is configured for 6 Ω
below. Configure the bi-amp settings to activate connections. speakers, 4 Ω speakers can also be used as the front speakers.
Switch this unit to the standby mode.
Zone3 J1 Zone2 J1
1
Press MAIN ZONE A while pressing and holding
2 STRAIGHT on the front panel.
SURROUND BACK/
BI-AMP
SPEAKERS FRONT Release the keys when “ADVANCED SETUP” is displayed on
ZONE2/ZONE3 ZONE2/ZONE3/
F.PRESENCE
the front panel display.
After approximately a few seconds, the top menu item is
displayed. J2
SINGLE
MAIN ZONE A
EXTRA SP2 EXTRA SP1
HDMI OUT
1 2 AV 1 AV 2 AV 3 AV 4 AV 5 AV 6 AV 7
ARC SELECTABLE ARC (1 BD/DVD)
AV 1 AV 2 AV 3 AV 4 COMPONENT VIDEO TRIGGER

(1 BD/DVD) AV OUT MON.OUT/ZONE OUT Y PB PR Y AV 3 PB C PR OUT
AV 1
1
A MONITOR OUT/ZONE OUT REMOTE
PHONO 1 2
GND
AV 2
2
B
AV 4 D +12V 0.1A MAX.
AUDIO 1 AUDIO 2 AUDIO 3 AUDIO 4 MULTI CH INPUT
1

HDMI OUT
FRONT/ (REAR) 1 2 AV 1 AV 2 AV 3 AV 4 AV 5 AV 6 AV 7
FRONT SURROUND SUR. BACK SUBWOOFER E2
ZONE ZONE 3 F. PRESENCE SURROUND SUR. BBACK FER CENTER
ZONE 3
a COAXIAL b COAXIAL c OPTICAL d OPTICAL e OPTICAL f COAXIAL SUBWOOFER
SPEAKERS
ZONE2/ZONE3 SURROUND SURROUND BACK/ CENTER FRONT ZONE2/ZONE3/
AC IN
BI-AMP F.PRESENCE
AV 1 AV 2 AV 3 AV 4 COMPONENT VIDEO TRIGGER
(1 BD/DVD) AV OUT MON.OUT/ZONE OUT Y PB PR Y AV 3 PB C PR OUT
AV 1
1
ANTENNA A MONITOR OUT/ZONE OUT REMOTE
PHONO 1 2
FM (4 RADIO)GND AM Y PB PR
75 GND IN OUT IN OUT
AV 2
2
B
AV 4 D +12V 0.1A MAX.
1
FRONT/ (REAR)
FRONT SURRO
SURROUND SUR. BACK SUBWOOFER ZONE 2 ZONE 3 SURROUND SUR. BACK CENTER
a COAXIAL b COAXIAL c OPTICAL d OPTICAL e OPTICAL f COAXIAL
AXIAL F. PRESENCE SUBWOOFER
SPEAKERS
ZONE2/ZONE3 SURROUND SURROUND BACK/ CENTER FRONT ZONE2/ZONE3/ AC IN
BI-AMP F.PRESENCE
ANTENNA
FM (4 RADIO)GND AM
75
NOTE
Before making bi-amplification connections, remove any
brackets or cables that connect a woofer with a tweeter. Refer to CAUTION
The EXTRA SP jacks of this unit should not be connected to a
the instruction manuals of speakers for details. When not
Passive Loudspeaker Selector Box or more than one loudspeaker
making bi-amplification connections, make sure that the STRAIGHT
per channel.
brackets or cables are connected before connecting the speaker
Connection to a Passive Loudspeaker Selector Box or multiple
cables.
speakers per channel could create an abnormally low impedance
Continues to the
load resulting in amplifier damage. See this owner’s manual for
next page
correct usage.
Compliance with minimum speaker impedance information for all
channels must be maintained at all times. This information is found
on the back panel of this unit.
J 1 : EXTRA SP1 jacks can be assigned to Zone3 and EXTRA SP2 jacks can be
assigned to Zone2 by using “Power Amp Assign” (☞p. 94).
J 2 : Refer to the “Extended functionality that can be configured as needed
(Advanced Setup menu)” (☞p. 121) for details on the Advanced Setup menu.
En 21
■ Connecting the subwoofers

Check that “SPEAKER IMP.” is displayed on the
3 front panel.
+ FR
ON
T
3 PRE
OUT
(SIN
G LE)
(FR
2
ONT)
1
SPEAKERIMP.
8MIN
- 1 SURR
2
UND
4
SUR.
BAC K (R
SUB EAR)
WOO
FER
CEN
Press STRAIGHT repeatedly to select a “6ΩMIN.”
4
TER
CEN
TER
Switch this unit to the standby mode, and then

5 switch it on again. 1 Remove approximately 10 mm of insulation from the
ends of the speaker cables, and twist the bare wires
1 Connect the subwoofer input jack to the
SUBWOOFER 1 and/or 2 jack on this unit with an
The power turns on, when the settings you made has been of the cables together firmly so that they will not
configured. cause short circuits. audio pin cable. J1
■ Connecting speakers Set the subwoofer volume as follows.

This type of jack can connect to the following speakers or 2 Loosen the speaker terminals.
2 Volume: Set to approximately half volume (or slightly less than
connection. half).
Insert the bare wire of the speaker cable into the gap
•
•
Front L/R speakers
Center speaker
3 on the side of the terminal.
Crossover frequency (if available): Set to maximum.
• Surround L/R speakers VOLUME

CROSSOVER/
HIGH CUT
Tighten the terminal.
•
•
Surround back L/R speakers
Presence L/R speakers
4
• Zone2/Zone3 speakers
• Bi-amp connection (Front L/R speakers) MIN MAX MIN MAX
Subwoofer examples
NOTE
After connection, applying this setting to this unit is required to
activate all speaker connections. With using “Power Amp
Assign” function, you can easily apply the speaker
configuration.
Refer to “Power Amp Assign” (☞p. 94) for details on using
“Power Amp Assign” function.
J 1 : When only one subwoofer is used, connect the subwoofer to the

SUBWOOFER1 jack.
En 22
CONNECTIONS
Advanced speaker configuration
Speaker layout utilizing an external power ■ Using a hi-fi amplifier to improve front ■ Using an external amplifier to output the
amplifier speaker sound quality presence speaker channel
■ 9.1-channel speaker layout ■ 7.1 + Presence speaker layout
More speakers can be used by connecting an external amplifier to this (7 speakers + subwoofer + external front speakers) (7 speakers + subwoofer + external front presence
unit’s PRE OUT jacks. The speaker layout specified using the Power speakers)
PL EA PR
Amp Assign function varies when an external amplifier is connected.
PL EA PR
Symbols on the table C
L R
C
L R
L Front L speaker PL Front presence L speaker
SW
C Center speaker PR Front presence R speaker SW
SL SR
R Front R speaker SBL SBR SL SR
Speakers that output sound
SBL SBR
SL Surround L speaker
Speakers that output sound
depending upon settings
SR Surround R speaker The front speaker channel can be enhanced by using an external
amplifier possible of greater output power than this unit. The front presence and surround back speaker channels can be
EA External amplifier
SBL Surround back L speaker output at the same time.
SBR Surround back R speaker
CENTER jack Center speaker
■ Connections of speakers SURROUND jacks Surround L/R speakers
FRONT jacks Front L/R speakers
Connect the speakers to the following jacks according to the speaker CENTER jack Center speaker
layout. Refer to “Front/Center/Surround/Surround back speaker and SURROUND BACK jacks Surround back L/R speakers
Subwoofer connection” and “Presence speaker connection” for details FRONT (PRE OUT) jacks External amplifier
on connecting speakers (☞p. 20). Refer “Connecting an external (for front L/R speakers) SURROUND BACK jacks Surround back L/R speakers
amplifier” for details on connecting an external amplifier (☞p. 25). SUBWOOFER (PRE OUT) jack J1 Subwoofer F.PRESENCE (PRE OUT) jacks External amplifier
(for presence L/R speakers)
■ Assigning a speaker configuration EXTRA SP1 jacks Presence L/R speakers
SUBWOOFER (PRE OUT) jack J1 Subwoofer
A speaker configuration must be assigned to this unit to activate
speakers and an external amplifier. Use the “Power Amp Assign” ■ Assigning a speaker configuration
function to easily apply the appropriate speaker settings to this unit ■ Assigning a speaker configuration
Power Amp Assign 7ch + FRONT
in accordance with speaker configuration. Power Amp Assign 7ch + FPR
J 1 : You can also use two subwoofers by connecting them to both SUBWOOFER1
(FRONT) and SUBWOOFER2 (REAR) jacks.
En 23
CONNECTIONS Advanced speaker configuration
■ Using the presence speakers in the main ■ Using front speakers that support bi-amp ■ Using front speakers that support bi-amp
room and speakers in another room connection and front presence speakers connection and surround back speakers
■ 9-1-channel speaker layout ■ 7.1-channel speaker layout ■ 7.1-channel speaker layout
(7 speakers + subwoofer + external presence (Front speaker (Bi-amp) + 3 speakers + subwoofer (Front speaker (Bi-amp) + 3 speakers + subwoofer
speakers + front speakers (in secondary zone)) + external front presence speakers) + external surround back speakers)
PL EA PR L R PL EA PR
BI-AMP BI-AMP BI-AMP BI-AMP
C C C
L R L R L R
SW SW SW
SL SR SL SR SL SR
SBL SBR SBL SBR
EA
The presence speakers in the main room can be used while the A richer sound field can be created with the simultaneous use of Connecting surround back speakers to an external amplifier
front speakers in another room are used. J1 front speakers that support bi-amp connection and front enables simultaneous use of front speakers that support bi-amp
presence speakers. connection and surround back speakers.
■ Connections of speakers ■ Connections of speakers
FRONT jacks Front L/R speakers
CENTER jack Center speaker FRONT jacks Front L/R speakers (bi-amp) FRONT jacks Front L/R speakers (bi-amp)
SURROUND jacks Surround L/R speakers CENTER jack Center speaker CENTER jack Center speaker
SURROUND BACK jacks Surround back L/R speakers SURROUND jacks Surround L/R speakers SURROUND jacks Surround L/R speakers
EXTRA SP1 jacks J2 Zone2 speakers SURROUND BACK jacks Front L/R speakers (bi-amp) SURROUND BACK jacks Front L/R speakers (bi-amp)
F.PRESENCE (PRE OUT) jacks External amplifier F.PRESENCE (PRE OUT) jacks External amplifier SUR.BACK (PRE OUT) jacks External amplifier
(for presence L/R speakers) (for presence L/R speakers) (for surround back L/R speakers)
SUBWOOFER (PRE OUT) jack J3 Subwoofer SUBWOOFER (PRE OUT) jack J3 Subwoofer SUBWOOFER (PRE OUT) jack J3 Subwoofer
■ Assigning a speaker configuration ■ Assigning a speaker configuration ■ Assigning a speaker configuration
Power Amp Assign 7ch + FPR + 1ZONE Power Amp Assign 5ch BI-AMP + FPR Power Amp Assign 5ch BI-AMP + SB
J 1 : Sound cannot be output from the surround back speakers when it is output from J 3 : You can also use two subwoofers by connecting them to both SUBWOOFER1
speakers connected to the EXTRA SP1 jacks. (FRONT) and SUBWOOFER2 (REAR) jacks.
J 2 : EXTRA SP1 jacks can also be assigned to the Zone3 speakers with “Power
Amp Assign” (☞p. 94).
En 24
CONNECTIONS Advanced speaker configuration
■ Using front speakers that support bi-amp Connecting an external amplifier 1
connection, surround back speakers and Y

MONITOR OUT/ZONE OUT
PB PR IN
1
OUT
REMOTE
IN
2
OUT
front presence speakers The same channel signals are output from the jacks of the PRE AV 4 D
2
+12V 0.1A MAX.

PUT
■ 9.1-channel speaker layout

CENTER ZONE OUT PRE OUT (SINGLE) (FRONT)
OUT and ZONE OUT terminals as from their corresponding 1
(Front speaker (Bi-amp) + 3 speakers + subwoofer SPEAKERS terminals. When connecting an external power 2
+ external surround back speakers + external front amplifier (pre-main amplifier) to enhance speaker output, connect FRONT/ ((REAR))
BACK SUBWOOFER ZONE 2 ZONE 3 F. PRESENCE SURROUND SUR. BACK SUBWOOFER CENTER
presence speakers) the input terminals of the power amplifier to the PRE OUT and SURROUND
SPEAKERS
SURROUND BACK/ CENTER FRONT ZONE2/ZONE3/
BI-AMP F.PRESENCE
ZONE OUT terminals of this unit.

PL PR
NOTES
BI-AMP BI-AMP
L
C
R
• When a component is connected to the PRE OUT and ZONE abcde f
OUT terminals, do not connect speakers to the SPEAKERS
a ZONE2 jacks
terminals corresponding to those PRE OUT and ZONE OUT
SW Zone2 channel output jacks.
terminals. b ZONE3 jacks
• When an external amplifier equipped with a volume adjustment Zone3 channel output jacks.
SL SR function is connected, a sufficient volume level may not be c FRONT/F.PRESENCE (PRE OUT) jacks
SBL SBR achieved. Front channel or front presence channel output jacks.
Use of the following components is recommended. d SURROUND (PRE OUT) jacks
EA
Surround channel output jacks.
– An amplifier with no volume adjustment function.
e SUR. BACK (PRE OUT) jacks
When an external amplifier is used, front presence speakers and – An integrated amplifier equipped with a function that bypasses
Surround back output jacks. When you only connect one external
surround back speakers can be used simultaneously with front volume circuitry, such as the Yamaha A-S2000 with MAIN IN amplifier for the surround back channel, connect it to the SUR.
speakers that support bi-amp connection. J1 input. BACK (SINGLE) jack.
f CENTER (PRE OUT) jack
■ Connections of speakers Center channel output jack.
FRONT jacks Front L/R speakers (bi-amp)
CENTER jack Center speaker
SURROUND BACK jacks Front L/R speakers (bi-amp)
SUR.BACK (PRE OUT) jacks External amplifier
(for surround back L/R speakers)
F.PRESENCE (PRE OUT) jacks External amplifier
(for presence L/R speakers)
SUBWOOFER (PRE OUT) jack J2 Subwoofer

Power Amp Assign 5ch BI-AMP + SB + FPR
J 1 : An external amplifier equipped with four channels is required for this speaker
layout.
J 2 : You can also use two subwoofers by connecting them to both SUBWOOFER1
(FRONT) and SUBWOOFER2 (REAR) jacks.
En 25
CONNECTIONS
Connecting external components
Jacks and cables S-VIDEO jacks VIDEO jacks

To transmit S-video signals that include luminance These jacks transmit conventional analog video
This unit is equipped with the following input/output jacks. Use jacks and cables appropriate for (Y) and chrominance (C) components. signals.
components that you are going to connect. Use S-video cables. Use video pin cables.
■ Audio/Video jacks S-video cable AV 1 Video pin cable
HDMI jacks
Digital video and digital sound are transmitted through a single jack.
Only use an HDMI cable.
AV 1
HDMI cable
■ Audio jacks
OPTICAL jacks COAXIAL jacks
These jacks transmit optical digital audio signals. These jacks transmit coaxial digital audio signals.
Use fiber-optic cables for optical digital audio Use pin cables for digital audio signals.
• Use a 19-pin HDMI cable with the HDMI logo.
signals.
• We recommend using a cable less than 5.0 m long to prevent signal quality degradation.
• When a TV that supports HDMI functions and Audio Return Channel function is connected, audio Digital audio fiber-optic cable Digital audio pin cable
output from the TV can be input to this unit (☞p. 127).
• When a player and TV that support the 3D video format are connected to this unit, 3D content can be
played back.
• If you connect this unit to a component that has a DVI jack, an HDMI/DVI-D cable is required.
■ Analog video jacks AUDIO jacks

These jacks transmit conventional analog audio
COMPONENT VIDEO jacks signals.
The signal is separated into three components: Use stereo pin cables, connecting the red plug to
luminance (Y), chrominance blue (PB), and chrominance red (PR). the red R jack, and the white plug to the white L
Use component video pin cables with three plugs. jack.
Component video pin cable Stereo pin cable
EN
PON
COM
AV 1
A
En 26
CONNECTIONS Connecting external components
Connecting a TV monitor When connecting to a non-HDMI compatible TV

Connect to the TV using the same type of connection that you used to connect to the external
component, and change the inputs on your TV to match that of the external component you are using
This unit is equipped with the following four types of output jack for connection to a TV.
for playback. If the external component and TV are equipped with different types of analog video
HDMI OUT 1-2, COMPONENT VIDEO, S-VIDEO or VIDEO. Select the proper connection
jacks, this unit will convert the component video, S-video or video signal to component video, S-video
according to the input signal format supported by your TV.
or video signal, according to the type of video input jacks used by the TV. J2, J3
COMPONENT VIDEO jacks
HDMI OUT 1-2 jacks (MONITOR OUT) Input Output
COMPONENT COMPONENT
TV
VIDEO VIDEO
WORK
HDMI OUT
HDMI
Component
1
ARC
2
SELECTABLE ARC
AV 1
(1 BD/DVD)
AV 2 AV 3 AV 4 AV 5
video input
AV 4 COMPONENT VIDEO
AV OUT MON.OUT/ZONE OUT Y PB PR Y AV 3 PB C PR S VIDEO S VIDEO
VIDEO jack AV 1
1 S-video input
(MONITOR OUT) AV 2
Y PB PR IN
B
AV 4 D
S-VIDEO jack AUDIO 1

(2 TV)
AUDIO 2
(3 CD)
AUDIO 3 AUDIO 4 MULTI CH INPUT
CENTER ZONE OUT PRE OUT (SINGLE) VIDEO VIDEO
(MONITOR OUT) Video input
FRONT/
FRONT SURROUND SUR. BACK SUBWOOFER ZONE 2 ZONE 3 SURROUND SUR. BACK
AL d OPTICAL e OPTICAL f COAXIAL F. PRESENCE SU
SPEAKERS
ZONE2/ZONE3 SURROUND SURROUND BACK/
BI-AMP
CENT
Through
D AM
Converted
When connecting to an HDMI compatible TV

Video signal such as component video, S-video and video received by this unit is converted to HDMI and output to
the TV. Just select HDMI input on the TV to view video from any external source connected to this unit. J1
Input Output
HDMI HDMI
TV
HDMI input
COMPONENT
VIDEO
S VIDEO
VIDEO
Through
Converted
J 1 : You can change the resolution and aspect ratio when converting to HDMI to suit your requirements (☞p. 99).
J 2 : Set “Analog to Analog Conversion” to “On” (☞p. 99).
J 3 : Analog to analog conversion is available only for 480i/576i-resolution video signal.
En 27
CONNECTIONS
■ Connecting an HDMI video monitor ■ Connecting a component video monitor J1

Connect the HDMI cable to one of the HDMI OUT 1-2 jacks. Connect the component video cable to the COMPONENT VIDEO (MONITOR OUT) jacks.
HDMI input HDMI
HDMI OUT
2
SELECTABLE ARC
AV 1
(1 BD/DVD)
AV 2 AV 3 AV 4 AV 5 AV
Component video input
HDMI
HDMI
COMPONENT VIDEO
MON.OUT/ZONE OUT Y PB PR Y AV 3 PB C PR
AV 1
COMPONENT
HDMI A MONITOR OUT/ZONE OUT
1 VIDEO
Y PB PR IN O
DOCK NETWORK
HDMI OUT
1 2 AV 1 AV 2 PR
(1 BD/DVD) B
ARC SELECTABLE ARC
AV 4 D
AV 1 AV 2 AV 3 AV 4
MON.OUT/ZONE OUT
COMPONEN TV AUDIO 1
(2 TV)
AUDIO 2
(3 CD)
CENTER ZONE OUT PRE OUT (SINGLE) (FR
PB
(1 BD/DVD) AV OUT
HDMI
Y PB PR Y PB PR
AV 1
PHONO
A Y
GND
AV 2
B FRONT/ ((RE
FRONT SURROUND SUR. BACK SUBWOOFER ZONE 2 ZONE 3 SURROUND SUR. BACK
e OPTICAL f COAXIAL F. PRESENCE SUBW
SPEAKERS
AUDIO 1 AUDIO 2 AUDIO 3 AUDIO 4 MULTI CH ZONE2/ZONE3 SURROUND SURROUND BACK/ CENTER
(2 TV) (3 CD) BI-AMP
TV
FRONT SURROUND
ZONE2/ZONE3
HDMI EXTRA SP2 SINGLE
ANTENNA
HDMI
FM (4 RADIO)GND AM
75
EXTRA SP2
Projector ■ Connecting a S-video monitor J1

Connect the S-video cable to the S-VIDEO (MONITOR OUT) jack.
• Use a 19-pin HDMI cable with the HDMI logo.

DOCK NETWORK
HDMI OUT
• We recommend using a cable less than 5.0 m long to prevent signal quality degradation. 1
ARC
2
SELECTABLE ARC
AV 1
(1 BD/DVD)
• When a TV that supports the HDMI function and Audio Return Channel function is connected, audio AV 1
(1 BD/DVD)
AV 2 AV 3 AV 4
COMPONEN
PR
AV 1
output from the TV can be input to this unit (☞p. 127). PHONO
GND
A
AV 2 S-video input
• When a player and TV that support the 3D video format are connected to this unit, 3D content can be B
AUDIO 1 AUDIO 2 AUDIO 3 AUDIO 4 MULTI CH
played back.
(2 TV) (3 CD)
S VIDEO
• This unit is equipped with HDMI OUT 1 and 2 jacks. The active HDMI OUT jack(s) can be selected S
(☞p. 47). The active HDMI OUT jack(s) can be registered with the SCENE function (☞p. 84). a COAXIAL b COAXIAL c OPTICAL d OPTICAL e OPTICAL f COAXIAL FRONT SURROUND
ZONE2/ZONE3
ANTENNA
TV
FM (4 RADIO)GND AM
75
EXTRA SP2
J 1 : The video signal for the COMPONENT VIDEO or S-VIDEO jacks is converted and output from HDMI OUT 1-2 jacks.
When connecting to a TV via the HDMI jack, you do not need to use these jacks.
En 28
■ Connecting a video monitor J1 When using other TVs

Connect the video pin cable to the VIDEO (MONITOR OUT) jack. To transmit sound from the TV to this unit, connect the TV’s audio output to the AUDIO1-4 jacks.
DOCK NETWORK
HDMI OUT
1
ARC
2
SELECTABLE ARC
AV 1
(1 BD/DVD)
TV audio output Connection
AV 1
(1 BD/DVD)
AV 2 AV 3 AV 4
COMPONEN
PR Optical digital audio output Connect to the OPTICAL jack of the AUDIO1 with a fiber-optic cable.
AV 1
A
PHONO
GND
Coaxial digital audio output Connect to the COAXIAL jack of the AUDIO2 with a digital audio pin
V
AV 2
B Video input
cable.
(2 TV) (3 CD)
VIDEO
V
Analog stereo output Connect to one of the AUDIO1-4 with a stereo pin cable.

ZONE2/ZONE3
FRONT SURROUND
Select the input source connected via TV’s audio output jack to enjoy the TV sound.
If the TV supports optical digital audio output, we recommend that you connect the TV audio output
TV
75
ANTENNA
FM (4 RADIO)GND AM to the receiver’s AUDIO1 jack.
Connecting to AUDIO1 allows you to switch the input source to AUDIO1 with just a single key
EXTRA SP2 operation using the SCENE function (☞p. 49).
Available input jacks
Audio output DOCK NETWORK

1
HDMI OUT
2 AV 1
(Optical, coaxial, or analog) ARC SELECTABLE ARC (1 BD/DVD)
■ Listening to TV audio AV 1
(1 BD/DVD)
AV 2 AV 3 AV 4
AV OUT MON.OUT/ZONE OUT
AV 1
Y PB
COMPONEN
PR
AUDIO COAXIAL OPTICAL

To transmit sound from the TV to this unit, connect as followings according to the TV: PHONO
GND
A
AV 2
B
When using a TV that supports the Audio Return Channel function and HDMI (2 TV) (3 CD)
Control function
When your TV supports both HDMI Control (e.g., Panasonic VIERA Link) and Audio Return TV a COAXIAL b COAXIAL c OPTICAL d OPTICAL e OPTICAL f COAXIAL
ZONE2/ZONE3
FRONT SURROUND
Channel functions, audio/video output from the unit to the TV and audio output from the TV to the ANTENNA
FM (4 RADIO)GND AM
75
unit are possible using a single HDMI cable.

The input source is switched automatically to match operations carried out on the TV, and that EXTRA SP2
makes TV sound control easier to use.

For the connections and settings, refer to “Single HDMI cable input to TV audio with Audio Return
Channel function” (☞p. 127). You can control your TV using the receiver’s remote control by entering the TV’s remote control
When using a TV that supports the HDMI Control functions code (☞p. 113).
When using a TV that supports HDMI Control functions (e.g., Panasonic VIERA Link), if HDMI
Control functions are enabled on the unit, then input source can be switched automatically to match
operations carried out on the TV.
For the connections and settings, refer to “Switching the input source on this unit automatically
when listening to TV audio” (☞p. 126).
J 1 : The video signal for the VIDEO jacks is converted and output from HDMI OUT 1-2 jacks. When connecting to a TV via the
HDMI jack, you do not need to use these jacks.
En 29
SOURCE RECEIVER
Connecting BD/DVD players and other devices ■ Receiving video signals from the HDMI jack and audio signals
AV
from jacks other than HDMI
1 2 3 4
This unit has the following input jacks. Connect them to the appropriate output jacks on This unit can use the AV1-4 or AUDIO1-4 input jacks to receive audio signals from
5 6 7 V-AUX
d the playback devices such as BD/DVD players. other input jacks.
AUDIO
1 2 3 4 For example, if a playback device cannot produce audio signals from an HDMI jack,
Input jack Video input Audio input
PHONO MULTI USB NET use the following method to change the audio input.
DOCK TUNER [A] [B] AV1 J1 HDMI/Component video/S-video/Video HDMI/Coaxial digital/Analog (Stereo)
AV2 J1
DOCK NETWORK
HDMI/Component video/S-video/Video HDMI/Coaxial digital/Analog (Stereo) 1
ARC
HDMI OUT
2
SELECTABLE ARC
AV 1
(1 BD/DVD)
AV3 J1
AV 1 AV 2 AV 3 AV 4 COMPONEN
HDMI/Component video/S-video/Video HDMI/Optical digital/Analog (Stereo) (1 BD/DVD) AV OUT MON.OUT/ZONE OUT
AV 1
Y PB HDMIPR
A
PHONO
GND
AV4 J1 HDMI/Component video/S-video/Video HDMI/Optical digital/Analog (Stereo) HDMI/Audio (Optical) AV 2

B
output AUDIO 1
(2 TV)
AUDIO 2
(3 CD)
AUDIO 3 AUDIO 4 MULTI CH
AV5 HDMI HDMI

HDMI
HDMI FRONT SURROUND
AV6 HDMI HDMI OPTICAL
ZONE2/ZONE3
OPTION
p O O
AV7 HDMI HDMI 75
ANTENNA
FM (4 RADIO)GND AM
ENTER
i AUDIO1 — Optical digital/Analog (Stereo)
EXTRA SP2
AUDIO2 — Coaxial digital/Analog (Stereo)

BD/DVD player
AUDIO3 — Analog (Stereo)
AUDIO4 — Analog (Stereo)

Press dInput selector to choose an input source (AV1-4, V-AUX,
VIDEO AUX
PHONO
HDMI/S-video/Video
—
HDMI/Optical digital/Analog (Stereo)
Analog (for turntable connection only)

1 AUDIO1-4, or PHONO).
Press pOPTION to enter the Option menu.

■ Connecting BD/DVD players and other devices with
HDMI cable
2
Connect the device with an HDMI cable to one of the HDMI jacks of the AV1-7. The Press iCursor B / C to choose “Audio Select” and press
HDMI IN jack of the VIDEO AUX on the front panel can also be used.
Select the input source (AV1-7 or V-AUX) that the playback device is connected to for
3 iENTER.
playback. Press iCursor D / E to choose an audio input jack and press
HDMI
4 iENTER.
AV 1 AV 2 AV 3 AV 4 AV 5 AV 6 AV 7
HDMI output (1 BD/DVD)
Once setup is complete, press pOPTION to close the Option menu.

HDMI
HDMI
Y PB
COMPONENT VIDEO
PR
HDMI Y AV 3 PB C PR
Y
PB PR IN
1
OUT
REMOTE
IN
2
OUT
TRIGGER
OUT
1 5
2
AV 4 D +12V 0.1A MAX.

AUDIO 4 MULTI CH INPUT
1
FRONT/ ((REAR))
BD/DVD player FRONT SURROUND SUR. BACK SUBWOOFER ZONE 2 ZONE 3 F. PRESENCE
SPEAKERS
SURROUND SUR. BACK SUBWOOFER CENTER
J 1 : Coaxial digital and optical digital jack function can be assigned to other AV jacks using “Input Assignment.” Refer to “Input Assignment” for details (☞p. 106).
En 30
■ Connecting BD/DVD players and other devices with component Using analog stereo audio output sources
video cables Connect the playback device to the AV1, AV2, AV3, or AV4 jacks.
Connect the device with a component video cable to one of the AV1-4 input jacks.
Component video /
Using optical digital audio output sources Audio output DOCK NETWORK
HDMI OUT
Connect the playback device to the AV3 or AV4 jacks. 1
ARC
2
SELECTABLE ARC
Y PB
AV 1
(1 BD/DVD)
PR
AV 2 AV 3
COMPONENT
AV 1 AV 2 AV 3 AV 4
(1 BD/DVD) AV OUT MON.OUT/ZONE OUT Y PB PR Y PB C PR
AV 1
PR A
Component video / PHONO
GND
NETWORK H AV 2
Audio (Optical) 1
HDMI OUT
2 AV 1 AV 2
Y PB
AV 3
PR PB B
AV 4 D
(1 BD/DVD)
output
ARC SELECTABLE ARC
(2 TV) (3 CD) CENTER ZONE O
AV 2 AV 3 AV 4 COMPONE
Y L
AV OUT MON.OUT/ZONE OUT Y PB PR Y AV 3 PB C PR
COMPONENT AV 1
A
Y AUDIO R
AV 2 FRONT SURROUND SUR. BACK SUBWOOFER ZONE 2 Z
L a COAXIAL b COAXIAL c OPTICAL d OPTICAL e OPTICAL f COAXIAL
PR B
D
AV 4 ZONE2/ZONE3 SURROUND
(2 TV) (3 CD) CENTER ZONE OUT
PB R
ANTENNA
FM (4 RADIO)GND AM
Y 75
FRONT SURROUND SUR. BACK SUBWOOFER ZONE 2 ZON

b COAXIAL c OPTICAL d OPTICAL e OPTICAL f COAXIAL
OPTICAL ZONE2/ZONE3 SURROUND
EXTRA SP2
O O
ANTENNA
FM (4 RADIO)GND AM
BD/DVD player
EXTRA SP2
BD/DVD player
Using coaxial digital audio output sources

Connect the playback device to the AV1 or AV2 jacks.
Component video / DOCK NETWORK

HDMI OUT
Audio (Coaxial) 1
ARC
2
SELECTABLE ARC
Y PB
AV 1
PR
(1 BD/DVD)
AV
output
AV 1 AV 2 AV 3 AV 4 ENT V
(1 BD/DVD) AV OUT MON.OUT/ZONE OUT Y PB PR Y
COMPONENT AV 1
A
PHONO
VIDEO GND
AV 2
PR B
AUDIO 1 AUDIO 2 AUDIO 3 AUDIO 4 MULTI CH INP

(2 TV) (3 CD)
PB
FRONT SURROUND SUR.

COAXIAL ZONE2/ZONE3
C C
ANTENNA
FM (4 RADIO)GND AM
75
EXTRA SP2
BD/DVD player
En 31
■ Connecting BD/DVD players and other devices with S-video Using analog stereo audio output sources
cables Connect the playback device to the AV1, AV2, AV3, or AV4 jacks.
Connect the playback device with a S-video cable to one of the AV1-4 input jacks.
DOCK NETWORK
Using optical digital audio output sources 1

ARC
HDMI OUT
2
SELECTABLE ARC
AV 1
(1 BD/DVD)
Connect the playback device to the AV3 or AV4 jacks. AV 1

(1 BD/DVD)
AV 2 AV 3 AV 4
COMPONEN
PR
S-video / Audio AV 1
A
PHONO
output GND
AV 2
DOCK NETWORK
HDMI OUT
S B
1 2 AV 1
ARC SELECTABLE ARC (1 BD/DVD) VIDEO AUDIO 1 AUDIO 2 AUDIO 3 AUDIO 4 MULTI CH
(2 TV) (3 CD)
S L
(1 BD/DVD) AV OUT MON.OUT/ZONE OUT Y PB PR
AV 1
PHONO
A AUDIO R
GND
FRONT SURROUND
AV 2
S-video / Audio (Optical) S B
ZONE2/ZONE3
output AUDIO 1
(2 TV)
AUDIO 2
(3 CD)
R
ANTENNA
VIDEO 75
FM (4 RADIO)GND AM
S
FRONT SURROUND
OPTICAL ZONE2/ZONE3
EXTRA SP2
O O
75
ANTENNA
FM (4 RADIO)GND AM BD/DVD player
EXTRA SP2
BD/DVD player

DOCK NETWORK
HDMI OUT
1 2 AV 1
AV 1
A
PHONO
GND
S-video / Audio (Coaxial) S AV 2

B
output AUDIO 1
(2 TV)
AUDIO 2
(3 CD)
VIDEO
S
FRONT SURROUND
COAXIAL ZONE2/ZONE3
C C
ANTENNA
FM (4 RADIO)GND AM
75
EXTRA SP2
BD/DVD player
En 32
■ Connecting BD/DVD players and other devices with video cables Using analog stereo audio output sources
Connect the playback device with a video pin cable to one of the AV1-4 input jacks. Connect the playback device to the AV1, AV2, AV3, or AV4 jacks.
Using optical digital audio output sources DOCK NETWORK

HDMI OUT
Connect the playback device to the AV3 or AV4 jacks. 1

ARC
2
SELECTABLE ARC
AV 1
(1 BD/DVD)
COMPONEN
Video / Audio V AV 1
A
DOCK NETWORK
1
HDMI OUT
2 AV 1 output PHONO
GND
(1 BD/DVD) AV 2
ARC SELECTABLE ARC
B
AV 1 AV 2 COMPONEN
VIDEO AUDIO 1 AUDIO 2 AUDIO 3 AUDIO 4 MULTI CH
(2 TV) (3 CD)
AV 1
V L
V A
PHONO
GND
AV 2 AUDIO R
Video / Audio (Optical) B
a COAXIAL b COAXIAL c OPTICAL d OPTICAL e OPTICAL f COAXIAL FRONT SURROUND

L
output AUDIO 1
(2 TV)
AUDIO 2
(3 CD)
ZONE2/ZONE3
R
VIDEO ANTENNA
FM (4 RADIO)GND AM
V FRONT SURROUND
75
OPTICAL ZONE2/ZONE3
O O
EXTRA SP2
ANTENNA
FM (4 RADIO)GND AM
75
BD/DVD player
EXTRA SP2
BD/DVD player

DOCK NETWORK
HDMI OUT
1 2 AV 1
AV 3 AV 4 COMPONEN
AV 1
V A
PHONO
GND
Video / Audio (Coaxial) AV 2

B
output AUDIO 1
(2 TV)
AUDIO 2
(3 CD)
VIDEO
V
FRONT SURROUND
COAXIAL ZONE2/ZONE3
C C
ANTENNA
FM (4 RADIO)GND AM
75
EXTRA SP2
BD/DVD player
En 33
■ Connecting CD players and other audio devices Using coaxial digital output sources
Connect the playback device to the AUDIO2 jack.
Using analog stereo output sources
Connect the playback device to the AUDIO1, AUDIO2, AUDIO3, or AUDIO4 jacks.
DOCK NETWORK
HDMI OUT
1 2 AV 1
DOCK NETWORK AV 1 AV 2 AV 3 AV 4
HDMI OUT COMPONEN
AV 1 (1 BD/DVD) AV OUT MON.OUT/ZONE OUT Y PB PR
1 2
ARC SELECTABLE ARC (1 BD/DVD) AV 1
A
PHONO
GND
(1 BD/DVD) AV OUT MON.OUT/ZONE OUT Y PB PR AV 2
AV 1
B
A
PHONO AUDIO 1 AUDIO 2 AUDIO 3 AUDIO 4 MULTI CH
(2 TV) (3 CD)
GND
AV 2
B
AUDIO 1
(2 TV)
AUDIO 2
(3 CD)
AUDIO 3 AUDIO 4 MULTI CH Audio (Coaxial) output
Audio output L FRONT SURROUND
COAXIAL ZONE2/ZONE3
AUDIO R
FRONT SURROUND
C C
ANTENNA
ZONE2/ZONE3
FM (4 RADIO)GND AM
75
R
ANTENNA
FM (4 RADIO)GND AM
75
EXTRA SP2
EXTRA SP2 CD player
CD player
We recommend connecting audio devices with a coaxial digital output to the AUDIO2 coaxial digital jack on this
unit. This connection allows you to switch to the AUDIO2 just by pressing the “CD” SCENE key (☞p. 49).
Using optical digital output sources
Connect the playback device to the AUDIO1 jack. ■ Connecting a turntable
Connect the audio output of the turntable to PHONO jacks of this unit. J1
DOCK NETWORK
HDMI OUT
1 2 AV 1

DOCK NETWORK
HDMI OUT
1 2 AV 1
AV 1 AV 2 AV 3 AV 4 COMPONEN ARC SELECTABLE ARC (1 BD/DVD)

AV 1
A AV 1 AV 2 AV 3 AV 4 COMPONEN
PHONO (1 BD/DVD) AV OUT MON.OUT/ZONE OUT Y PB PR
GND
AV 1
AV 2 A
B Audio output GND
AUDIO 1 AUDIO 2 AUDIO 3 AUDIO 4 MULTI CH AV 2

(2 TV) (3 CD)
B
GND AUDIO 1
(2 TV)
AUDIO 2 AUDIO 3 AUDIO 4 MULTI CH
(3 CD)
Audio (Optical) output L
a COAXIAL b COAXIAL c OPTICAL d OPTICAL e OPTICAL f COAXIAL FRONT SURROUND AUDIO

R
OPTICAL ZONE2/ZONE3
L FRONT SURROUND
O O ZONE2/ZONE3
ANTENNA R
FM (4 RADIO)GND AM
75
ANTENNA
FM (4 RADIO)GND AM
75
EXTRA SP2
EXTRA SP2
CD player
Turntable
Connect your turntable to the GND terminal of this unit to reduce noise in the signal.
J 1 : When connecting a turntable with a low-output MC cartridge to the PHONO jacks, use an in-line boosting transformer or MC-head amplifier.
En 34
Connecting game consoles or video camcorders Connecting a multi-format player or an external decoder
Use the VIDEO AUX jacks on the front panel to temporarily connect devices such as a game console or This unit has 8 sets of input jacks (FRONT L/R, CENTER, SURROUND L/R, SUR. BACK L/R and
video camcorder to the receiver. SUBWOOFER) to input multi-channel analog sound signals. If your playback component, such as a
Select the V-AUX input to use these connected devices. DVD player or SACD player, has multi-channel analog output capability, you can enjoy up to 7.1-
channel multi-channel sound. To output multi-channel sound, connect the audio output jacks of your
■ When connecting an HDMI compatible device playback component to the MULTI CH INPUT jacks of this unit, and set the input source of this unit to
Connect the HDMI output of the device to the HDMI IN jack of the VIDEO AUX. “MULTI CH.”
MULTI CH INPUT
CENTER
FRONT SURROUND SUR. BACK SUBWOOFER
Game Console,
Video Camcorder,
L R L R L R
etc.
HDMI
HDMI
HDMI output
HDMI
Surround back out

■ When connecting an non-HDMI compatible device
Subwoofer out
Surround out
Center out
Connect the video and audio outputs of the device to the VIDEO or S-VIDEO, and AUDIO or
Front out
OPTICAL jacks of the VIDEO AUX.
Multi-format player/External decoder

(7.1-channel output)
S
O
V L R
• When you select “MULTI CH” as the input source, the digital sound field processor and tone control are
VIDEO S-video output
S automatically disabled.
• As this unit does not redirect signals input through the MULTI CH INPUT jacks to compensate for
VIDEO Video output
V missing speakers, make appropriate settings on the multi-format player or the external decoder that suit
Game Console,
Video Camcorder, AUDIO to the speaker configuration.
etc. L Analog audio output • When the input source is switched to “MULTI CH,” images input from a component connected to the
R AV1-7 or VIDEO AUX jacks can be displayed on a video monitor (☞p. 83). If your DVD player does
OPTICAL
Audio (Optical) output not support multi-channel digital output, connect it to these input jacks.
O
• Be sure to turn down the volume when connecting this unit and the other devices.
• When both the HDMI connection and the analog video/audio connection are performed between the
HDMI compatible device and this unit, only the HDMI signal will be input.
En 35
Connecting a SCENE link playback-compatible device Using the Trigger function to link external component power
When the components are the Yamaha products and have the capability of the transmission of the When this unit is connected to a Yamaha subwoofer that supports the system connection or the
remote control signals, connect the REMOTE IN and REMOTE OUT jacks to the remote control input component with TRIGGER IN jack, you can turn on and off the component by using this unit.
and output jack with the monaural analog mini cable as follows.
System connection input
HDMI
1
(1 BD/DVD)
Remote control in
COMPONENT VIDEO TRIGGER
PR Y AV 3 PB C PR OUT
1 HDMI RS-232C
Y
PB PR IN
1
OUT IN
2
OUT
Yamaha component 2 AV 3 AV 4 AV 5 AV 6 AV 7
2 (CD or DVD player, etc.)

AV 4 D +12V 0.1A MAX.
DEO
MULTI CH INPUT AV 3 PB C PR OUT
1
1
MONITOR OUT/ZONE OUT REMOTE
1 2
2
2
AV 4 D +12V 0.1A MAX.

FRONT/ ((REAR)) UT
SURROUND SUR. BACK SUBWOOFER ZONE 2 ZONE 3 F. PRESENCE SURROUND SUR. BACK SUBWOOFER CENTER
ZONE OUT PRE OUT (SINGLE) (FRONT)
CENTER
SPEAKERS 1
SURROUND SURROUND BACK/ CENTER FRONT
BI-AMP
Yamaha subwoofer
Remote control out 2
that supports the system
ACK SUBWOOFER ZONE 2 ZONE 3
FRONT/
F. PRESENCE SURROUND SUR. BACK
((REAR))
SUBWOOFER CENTER connection
SPEAKERS
SURROUND SURROUND BACK/ CENTER FRONT ZONE2/ZONE3
Infrared signal receiver or BI-AMP F.PRESENCE
SINGLE EX Yamaha component Trigger input
TRIGGER IN
SINGLE EXTRA SP1
• When a Yamaha component that supports the SCENE link playback function is connected via the
REMOTE OUT jack, playback begins automatically when the SCENE function is used (☞p. 49).
• If the component connected to the REMOTE OUT jack is not a Yamaha product, set “SCENE IR” in the
Scene menu to “Off” (☞p. 85). Component with the
TRIGGER IN jack
(Power amplifier or
DVD player, etc.)
Functions of the TRIGGER OUT jack can be specified (☞p. 107).
En 36
Connecting audio/video recording devices Connecting to the network

This receiver can transmit selected incoming audio/video signals to external components through the To connect this unit to your network, plug one end of a network cable (CAT-5 or higher straight cable)
AV OUT jacks. You can record these input audio and video signals to VCRs or similar devices, or send into the NETWORK port of this unit, and plug the other end into one of the LAN ports on your router
them to other TVs or external components. that supports the DHCP (Dynamic Host Configuration Protocol) server function. To enjoy Internet
Radio or music files saved on PC and DLNA server such as NAS (Network Attached Storage), each
Video / Audio
input device must be connected properly in the network.
DOCK NETWORK HD
1
ARC
HDMI OUT
2
SELECTABLE ARC
AV 1
(1 BD/DVD)
AV 2 AV 3 VIDEO • Use an STP (shielded twisted pair) cable (commercially available) to connect a network hub or router
V
AV 1
(1 BD/DVD)
AV 2 AV 3 AV 4
COMPONENT VIDEO
PR Y AV 3 PB C PR
and this unit.
VIDEO
PHONO
V AV 1
A
Y
M
S
• If the DHCP server function on your router is disabled, you need to configure the network settings
GND
S AV 2
B
AV 4 D
manually (☞p. 103).
AUDIO
L L
R R
NAS
FRONT SURROUND SUR. BACK SUBWOOFER ZONE 2 ZONE
ZONE2/ZONE3 SURROUND
OPTICAL Internet (Network Attached Storage)
O O
ANTENNA
FM (4 RADIO)GND AM WAN
75
EXTRA SP2
LAN PC
VCR/Audio recorder Modem
HDMI audio/video signals and component video signals cannot be transmitted from these jacks. Router
Network cable
DOCK
HDMI OUT
1 2 AV 1
AV 1
A
PHONO
GND
AV 2
B

(2 TV) (3 CD)
FRONT SURROUND
ZONE2/ZONE3
ANTENNA
FM (4 RADIO)GND AM
75
EXTRA SP2
En 37
CONNECTIONS
Connecting a USB storage device

Connect a USB memory device or USB portable audio player to the USB port on the front panel of this
unit.
USB memory device or

USB portable audio player
NOTE
Be careful that the USB storage device is facing the correct way when inserted into the USB port of
this unit.
En 38
CONNECTIONS
Connecting the FM/AM antennas
An indoor FM antenna and an AM loop antenna are supplied with this receiver. Connect these antennas
properly to their respective jacks. ■ Improving FM reception
We recommend using an outdoor antenna. For more information, consult the nearest authorized
AM loop antenna
Indoor FM antenna Position the AM antenna away from the receiver. The dealer.
wires of the AM antenna have no polarity.
You can connect either wire to the AM jack or the ■ Improving AM reception
GND jack. Connect this unit to an outdoor antenna with a 5 – 10 m vinyl-coated wire. Make sure the AM loop
antenna is still connected.
Connecting the GND jack can reduce noise. Connect the jack to a store-bought ground bar or copper
DOCK NETWORK HD
1
ARC
HDMI OUT
2
SELECTABLE ARC
AV 1
(1 BD/DVD)
AV 2 AV 3
plate with a vinyl-covered wire and bury this new attachment in moist ground.
AV 1
(1 BD/DVD)
AV 2 AV 3 AV 4
COMPONENT VIDEO
PR Y AV 3 PB C PR
The GND jack is not to be connected to the ground socket of an electrical outlet.
AV 1
A M
PHONO
Y
GND
AV 2
B
AV 4 D
FRONT SURROUND SUR. BACK SUBWOOFER ZONE 2 ZONE

ZONE2/ZONE3 SURROUND
FM (4 RADIO)GND AM
75
EXTRA SP2
Connecting the AM loop antenna

Press and hold Insert Release
Assembling the AM loop antenna
En 39
CONNECTIONS
Setting up the speaker parameters automatically (YPAO)
This unit is equipped with a Yamaha Parametric Room Acoustic Optimizer (YPAO) that adjusts the configuration, size, and volume balance of the speakers in order to provide an optimal sound field.
Using YPAO allows you to automatically configure settings, such as adjusting speaker output and acoustic parameters to suit your listening room (the room in which this unit is placed). J1
Be aware of the following when using YPAO. Check the following before using YPAO. Place the supplied YPAO microphone at ear height in
• The amount of time for measurement varies from about two to ten
minutes according to settings.
1 2 your listening position.
This unit Face the head of the YPAO microphone upwards.
• The test tone is output at high volume. Refrain from using this
• The headphones are removed.
function at night when it may be a nuisance to others.
YPAO microphone
• Take care that the test tone does not frighten small children. TV
• This unit is connected to the TV correctly.
• The power is turned on.
YPAO operations can be viewed on the front panel display or • The video input to which the video output from this unit has been
TV screen. selected.
Subwoofer
• The power is turned on.
• Volume is set to approximately half, and the cross-over frequency (if
present) is set to maximum.
CROSSOVER/ When positioning the microphone, we recommend that you use

VOLUME HIGH CUT
equipment that allows you to adjust the height (such as a tripod)
as a microphone stand. When using a tripod, use the tripod
screws to fix the microphone in place.
MIN MAX MIN MAX
Subwoofer examples
Switch this unit on.
Power Amp Assign 3
• “Power Amp Assign” applies the appropriate speaker settings to this
unit according to speaker configuration. Continues to the
Refer to “Speaker layout” and “Speaker layout utilizing an external next page
power amplifier” for details (☞p. 16, p. 23).
J 1 : When you have changed the number of speakers or the locations in which they
are installed, first use YPAO to adjust the speaker balance.
En 40
CONNECTIONS
SOURCE RECEIVER
Connect the YPAO microphone to the YPAO Press iCursor B / C to select the “Multi Press iCursor B / C repeatedly to select
1 2
AV
3 4
4 MIC jack on the front panel. 5 Position” and press iENTER to set the
number of listening positions to measure.
6 the “Measure” and press iENTER to start
measurement.
5 6 7 V-AUX
AUDIO
To measure at the multiple listening positions (up to 8), Auto measurement starts in 10 seconds.
1 2 3 4
press iCursor B / C to select “Yes” and press
PHONO MULTI USB NET
iENTER. • To start the measurement immediately, press
DOCK TUNER [A] [B]
To measure at one listening position, press iENTER again.

iCursor B / C to select “No” and press iENTER. • To cancel the automatic setup, press iRETURN and
then iENTER.

YPAO M L T . P o s i t i o n Display during measurement
VOLUME
>YesNo
YPAO M e a s u r i n g . . . VOLUME
ENTER
i
“Mic On View ON SCREEN” appears on the front
panel display, and the following display appears on the
Progress0%
front panel display or TV screen.
RETURN

YPAO M e a s u r e m e n t VOLUME
ENTERtoStart
“Multi Position” is set to “Yes” at initial factory

settings. If not necessary, skip this step.
This completes preparation. To achieve more accurate Continues to the

results, take note of the following when measuring next page
acoustics.
• It takes a few minutes to accurately measure acoustics
for one position. Keep the room as quiet as possible
while acoustics are measured.
• Wait in a corner of the room, or leave it entirely, while
acoustics are measured to avoid creating an
obstruction between the speakers and the YPAO
microphone.
En 41
CONNECTIONS
SOURCE RECEIVER
When “Multi Position” is set to “No” in step 5 The following display appears when measurement at
Replace the optimizer microphone at your
1 2
AV
3 4
The following display appears when measurement
finishes without any problems. 7 choosing position and press iENTER to
restart the automatic measurement.
the last position finishes without any problems.
5 6 7 V-AUX

YPAO M e a s u r e . F i n i s h
Auto measurement restarts in 10 seconds.
AUDIO YPAO M e a s u r e . F i n i s h VOLUME
1 2 3 4 VOLUME
Save/Exit
PHONO MULTI USB NET Save/Exit
DOCK TUNER [A] [B]
The following illustration shows how to place the
optimizer microphone to optimize the setup of this
unit for eight listening positions for example. Up to 8
listening positions can be measured. J1
ENTER
i 8
Go to step 8. 6 7 NOTE
4 5 If a problem occurs, an error message or report is
21 3
When “Multi Position” is set to “Yes” in step 5 displayed either during or after acoustic measurement.
The following display appears when measurement at the Refer to “When an error message is displayed during
first position finishes without any problems. measurement” (☞p. 45), or “When a warning
message is displayed after measurement” (☞p. 45) to

YPAO M L T . P o s i t i o n 2 ? resolve the problem and measure acoustics with
VOLUME
YPAO again.
>YesNo Repeat step 7 until the measurement at all listening
positions are made.
Continues to the
next page
Go to step 7.
J 1 : Measure from the most frequent listening position, such as

directly in front of the TV, first.
En 42
CONNECTIONS
SOURCE RECEIVER
Press iCursor B / C to select “Save/Exit” Press iENTER.

8 10
Result Displays the results of automatic
AV
acoustics measurement. Refer to and press iENTER. Automatic setup is completed. Disconnect the
1 2 3 4 “Reviewing automatic setup parameters”
YPAO microphone.
(☞p. 44) for details.
5 6
AUDIO
7 V-AUX

YPAO S a v e / E x i t
1 2 3 4 Save/Exit SAVE Applies the result to the VOLUME
The YPAO microphone is sensitive to heat. When you

PHONO MULTI USB NET speaker setup and Select:Save have finished measuring, store the microphone out of
DOCK TUNER [A] [B] finishes the automatic
measurement. J1
direct sunlight, and away from locations that may
experience high temperatures, such as on top of AV
CANCEL Returns to the previous
equipment.
screen.
EXIT Finishes the automatic

measurement without
applying the result to the
speaker setup.
ENTER
i
• When the warning message appears on this display, Press iCursor D / E to select “SAVE”
RETURN
refer to “When an error message is displayed during
measurement” (☞p. 45) for details.
9 and press iENTER.
• Press iRETURN to return to the previous screen.

YPAO F I N I S H VOLUME
DisconnectMic
J 1 : The result of the measurement is assigned to the “Setting Pattern”

currently selected. Refer “Setting Pattern” (☞p. 93) for details on
“Setting Pattern.”
En 43
CONNECTIONS
SOURCE RECEIVER
■ Reviewing automatic setup

Select the desired menu item (or enable a Press iRETURN to finish the Result menu.
1 2
AV
3 4
parameters
The results of automatic acoustics measurement can be
2 function) using iCursor B / C / D / E and
iENTER.
3
5 6 7 V-AUX
reviewed once measurement is complete. The result of automatic setup can be fine-tuned
AUDIO
1 2 3 4 Wiring Displays the speakers connected to this manually by “Manual Setup.” Refer to “Manual
Press iCursor B / C repeatedly to select
PHONO
DOCK
MULTI
TUNER
USB
[A]
NET
[B]
1 “Result” and press iENTER immediately
after the automatic measurement.
unit and the polarity of each connected
speaker.
speaker setup” (☞p. 93) for details.
• “Normal” is displayed when the

polarity of the connected speaker is ■ Reloading automatic setup
The Result menu can be viewed only when the normal. parameters
automatic measurement is performed. • “Reverse” is displayed when the If you are not satisfied with the fine-adjustment of setup
polarity of the connected speaker is parameters with Manual Setup, the result of automatic
opposite.
The results of acoustics measurement are displayed. setup saved on this unit can be reloaded. Select “Setup
Size Displays the size of the connected Reload” in the Result menu.
speakers and the bass cross over
frequency (“Bass Crossover”). NOTE
ENTER
i
• “Large” is displayed when the When automatic setup parameters are reloaded,
RETURN
a c
connected speaker has the ability to
reproduce the low-frequency signals
manually configured settings are cleared. To avoid
clearing manually configured settings by reloading
effectively.
automatic setup parameters, see “Prohibiting setting
• “Small” is displayed when the
changes” (☞p. 108).
connected speaker does not have the
b ability to reproduce the low-frequency
signals effectively.
a List of menu items
Menu items available in the Result menu are displayed. Distance Displays the distance from the listening
b Number of measurement position to speakers. The unit for distance
Indicates the number of measurements for multiple can be switched between “ft” (feet) and
listening positions. “m” (meter) by pressing
c Diagram iCursor D / E (☞p. 96).
Shows the speaker setup and sound adjustment as diagram.
Level Displays the result of the adjustment of
each connected speaker output level.
Setup Reload J1 Clears the fine-adjustment with Manual

Setup and reloads the result of automatic
setup. For details, refer to “Reloading
automatic setup parameters.”
J 1 : This item is displayed after the fine-adjustment is performed with

“Manual Setup.” Use this item to return the settings to the result
of automatic setup.
En 44
CONNECTIONS
SOURCE RECEIVER
■ When an error message is ■ When a warning message is

Press iCursor E to select “RETRY.”
1 2
AV
3 4
displayed during measurement
See “Error messages” (☞p. 46) for instructions on
3 displayed after measurement
See “Warning messages” (☞p. 46) for instructions on
resolving the problem and measure acoustics again. resolving the problem. The speaker causing the problem
Press iENTER to use YPAO again.
4
5 6 7 V-AUX
AUDIO
can be confirmed from the TV screen display.
1 2 3 4
PHONO MULTI USB NET
DOCK TUNER [A] [B]
When “E-5” or “E-9” is displayed:
Press iENTER.
1
Check that the environment is suitable for
Check the error code displayed and use YPAO to
measure acoustics again as described below.
2 accurate measurement.
NOTE
i When “E-1,” “E-2,” “E-3,” “E-4” or “E-6” is Press iCursor D / E to select a option.
3
ENTER
Although the results of acoustics measurement can be
displayed: PROCEED: applied when a warning message is displayed, optimal
When “E-5” is displayed, measurement can proceed. sound will not be achieved. Resolving the problem
Press iENTER.
1 However, the measurement in noisy environment may
reduce the accuracy.
When “E-9” is displayed, resume the aborted step.
and using YPAO to measure acoustics again is
recommended.
Press iCursor E to select “EXIT.”

2 RETRY:
Restart measurement from the beginning.
To exit YPAO with some options
Use iCursor B / C to select “Save/Exit”

3 Press iENTER to terminate YPAO, and
switch the unit to standby mode. 4 Press iENTER to execute the selected
option. 1 and press iENTER.
Use iCursor D / E to select one of the

4 Check that the speakers are properly
connected.
When “E-10” is displayed: 2 following options and press iENTER.
SAVE:
Press iENTER.
5 Turn on the unit and use YPAO again.

1 Exits YPAO applying the results of measurement.
CANCEL:
Returns to the previous screen (warning message
Press iCursor E to select “EXIT.”
When “E-7” or “E-8” is displayed: 2 screen).
EXIT:
Exits YPAO without saving the results.
Press iENTER to terminate YPAO, and
1 Press iENTER.
3 switch the unit to standby mode.
Turn on the unit and use YPAO again.

2 Check that the environment is suitable for
accurate measurement. 4
En 45
CONNECTIONS
■ Message list E-8: The YPAO microphone could not distinguish a Check that the YPAO microphone has been
No Signal test tone. installed correctly.
NOTE
If the following messages appear, resolve the problems that have occurred and carry out the Check that each speaker has been connected
and installed correctly.
measurement process again.
The YPAO microphone or the YPAO MIC jack
may be broken. Inquire at the retailer where
■ When a warning message is displayed before measurement you purchased this unit, or the nearest Yamaha
service center.
Connect MIC! The YPAO microphone is not connected. Connect the YPAO microphone to the YPAO
MIC jack on the front panel. E-9: You have carried out an operation that has Carry out the measuring process again. Do not
User Cancel cancelled the measuring process. operate this unit by, for example, adjusting the
Unplug HP! The headphones are connected. Remove the headphones.
volume.
Memory Guard! The settings of this unit are protected. Set “Memory Guard” in the Setup menu to
E-10: An internal error has occurred. Carry out the measuring process again. Contact
“Off” (☞p. 108).
Internal Error a Yamaha service center if “E-10” is displayed
again.
■ Error messages
■ Warning messages
E-1: The unit was not able to find the front channel. Check that the left and right front speakers are
No Front SP connected correctly.
W-1: The speakers displayed are connected with the Depending on the type of speakers, “W-1” may
E-2: The unit was only able to find one of side of the Check that the left and right surround speakers Out of Phase opposite polarity. Depending on the type of display even if the speakers are connected
No Sur. SP surround channels. are connected correctly. speakers you are using and the environment in correctly.
which you have them installed, this message
E-3: The unit was only able to find one of side of the Check that the left and right presence speakers Check that the speaker polarity + (positive),
may occur even if the speakers are connected
No F.PRNS SP presence channels. are connected correctly. and - (negative) are correct. If these are
correctly.
connected correctly, you can use the speakers
E-4: Only one surround back speaker is connected When only one surround back speaker is
normally even this message appears.
SBR→SBL and only the right side surround back channel connected, connect to the left side (SINGLE)
sound is detected. terminal. W-2: The speakers displayed are separated from the Install the speakers with 24 m of the listening
Over 24m/80ft listening position by more than 24 m, and position.
E-5: The noise is too loud, preventing accurate Measure again in quiet surroundings. Turn off
cannot be adjusted correctly.
Noisy measurements from being taken. any devices in the room that may be emitting
noise, or place them further away from the W-3: Volume level varies greatly for individual Check that all speakers are installed in the
YPAO microphone. Level Error channels, and cannot be adjusted correctly. same surroundings.
When this message is displayed, selecting
Check that the speaker polarity + (positive),
“PROCEED” will allow you to continue
and - (negative) are correct.
measuring. However, we recommend resolving
the problem and measuring again, as continuing We recommend the same speakers or speakers
measurement without doing so will not give with as similar specifications as possible.
accurate results. Adjust the volume of the subwoofer.
E-6: Even though surround left and right speakers When using surround back speakers, connection
Check Sur. are not connected, only the surround back of the surround left/right speakers is necessary.
speakers are connected. If “W-2” or “W-3” appears, you can apply measurement results, but they will not give optimal
results. We recommend that you resolve the problem and carry out the measurement process again.
E-7: The YPAO microphone has been removed. While measuring, take care not to touch the
No MIC YPAO microphone.
En 46
SOURCE RECEIVER
PLAYBACK
Basic playback procedure
AV ■ Selecting the active HDMI OUT jack
Turn on external components (TV, DVD Press nVOLUME +/- to adjust the volume.
1 4
1 2 3 4
Use this function to select the HDMI OUT jack(s) used

5 6 7 V-AUX
player, etc.) connected to this unit.
AUDIO
d to output signal.
1 2 3 4
To mute the output.

Use the dInput selector to select the input
2 Press wHDMI OUT repeatedly to select setting.
PHONO MULTI USB NET
Press oMUTE to mute the audio output.

DOCK TUNER [A] [B]
source. The HDMI output setting changes as follows.
Press oMUTE again to unmute.
The name of the selected input source is displayed on
the front panel display. J1 HDMIOUTSel. HDMIOUTSel.
OUT1+2 OUT1
MUTE VOLUME
n When USB, NET, DOCK or TUNER is selected, the HDMIOUTSel. HDMIOUTSel.
content window is displayed (☞p. 61). Off OUT2
o
OUT 1+2 Outputs the signal at both the HDMI OUT 1
Play the external component that you have
3 selected as the source input, or select a
radio station on the tuner.
OUT 1
and HDMI OUT 2 jacks simultaneously.
Outputs the signals at the HDMI OUT 1 jack.
OUT 2 Outputs the signals at the HDMI OUT 2 jack.

Refer to the instruction manuals provided with the
external component for details on playback. Off Any signals are not output at the HDMI OUT
HDMI OUT
w 1 and HDMI OUT 2 jacks. Select this setting
For details on the following operations, refer to the when you do not use the video monitor
corresponding pages: connected to one of the HDMI OUT jacks.
TUN./CH
• “FM/AM tuning” (☞p. 62)
• “Playing back tunes on the PC” (☞p. 66)
• The HDMI OUT jack that utilizes the HDMI Control
• “Playing back tunes on the USB storage devices”
function can be selected with “Control Select”
(☞p. 68)
• “Listening to the Internet Radio” (☞p. 70)
(☞p. 101).
• “Playing back tunes from your iPod™/iPhone™” • When “HDMI Control” is set to “On,” the HDMI OUT
(☞p. 73) jack selected with “Control Select” is automatically
• “Playing back tunes from Bluetooth™ components” enabled in addition to the HDMI OUT jack selected
(☞p. 77) here by commands from the external component
supporting HDMI Control connected to the jack
(☞p. 101).
• The active HDMI OUT jack(s) can be registered with
the SCENE function (☞p. 84).
J 1 : You can change the input source name displayed on the front
panel display as necessary (☞p. 82).
En 47
PLAYBACK
Basic playback procedure
■ Adjusting high/low-frequency sound

Press PROGRAM l / h to adjust the output level in
(Tone control)
You can adjust the balance of the high-frequency range (Treble)
2 the following frequency range.
and low-frequency range (Bass) of sounds output from the front
Adjustable range -6.0 dB to +6.0 dB
left and right speakers to obtain desired tone.
Adjustment 0.5 dB
The tone control of the speakers or headphones can be set increments
separately. Set the headphone tone control with the headphones
connected. The display returns to the previous display soon after you release
the key.
• The tone control settings are not effective when this unit is in the
Press TONE/BALANCE on the front panel repeatedly
1 to select “Treble” or “Bass.”
Pure Direct Mode or “MULTI CH” is selected as an input source.
• If you set the balance extremely off, sounds may not match those
TONE/BALANCE from other channels well.
• The tone control can also be adjusted in the Option menu
(☞p. 59).
PROGRAM l / h
The current setting is displayed on the front panel display.
Tone Control VOLUME
Treble+0.5dB
En 48
PLAYBACK
Changing input settings with a single key (SCENE function)
This unit has a SCENE function that allows you switch this unit on and change input sources, the settings of Audio Select, HDMI Output, Sound Program, Pure Direct Mode, Tone Control, Adaptive
DRC, and Compressed Music Enhancer with one key.
Selecting a SCENE suited to an external component SCENE 3

Settings are configured for listening to CD content. Press this key and play back content from the CD
player connected to the AUDIO2 jack on this unit.
At initial factory settings, SCENE functions are configured for the following components.
Select a scene according to the component that will be used for playback.
SCENE 4
SCENE
Settings are configured for listening to a radio station. Press this key and tune into a radio station.
1 2 3 4
SCENE 5-12
BD/DVD TV CD RADIO The nothing is registered on the scenes at initial factory setting. The favorite settings can be registered on the scenes
SCENE 1 and reloaded by using “Save” and “Load” in Scene menu. For details, refer to “Scene menu” (☞p. 85).
Settings are configured for viewing DVD or Blu-ray Disc content. Press this key and play back content
from the DVD or Blu-ray Disc player connected to the AV1 jack on this unit. • When switching scenes, also change the external component that the remote control operates (☞p. 111).
• We recommend that selecting a scene and editing the SCENE function are performed in the Scene menu
SCENE 2 (☞p. 84).
Settings are configured for viewing TV content. Press this key and turn on the TV connected to the • This unit has eight additional scene functions. After selecting one of these scenes, one of the additional
AUDIO1 jack on this unit. eight scenes may also be selected (☞p. 85).
• Press and hold eSCENE key for about three seconds to register the current setting to the scene.
Four scenes are available for different uses, such as playing movies or music. The following settings such as input sources, sound programs, and HDMI Output are provided at initial factory settings.
Settings that are not checked ( ) are not enabled when a scene key is pressed. Use “Load” in the Scene menu to check settings to be enabled. Refer to “Adjusting settings registered with the SCENE function”
for details (☞p. 85).
Compressed CINEMA
Audio HDMI Sound Pure Direct Adaptive Dialogue Extended Video Video Master Setting PEQ
Input Tone Control Music DSP 3D Lipsync Delay
SCENE Select Output Program Mode DRC Lift Surround Adjustment Processing Volume Pattern Select
Enhancer Mode
✓ ✓ ✓ ✓
1 AV1 Auto OUT 1+2 Drama Auto Bass: 0.0dB On Off On 0 Auto Off Off -40.0dB Auto 0ms Pattern1 Natural
(BD/DVD Treble: 0.0dB
Movie Viewing)
2 AUDIO1 Auto OUT 1+2 STRAIGHT Auto Bass: 0.0dB On On On 0 Auto Off Off -40.0dB Auto 0ms Pattern1 Natural
(TV Viewing) Treble: 0.0dB
3 AUDIO2 Auto OUT 1+2 STRAIGHT Auto Bass: 0.0dB Off Off On 0 Auto Off Off -40.0dB Auto 0ms Pattern1 Natural
(CD Music Treble: 0.0dB
Listening)
4 TUNER --- OUT 1+2 STRAIGHT Auto Bass: 0.0dB Off On On 0 Auto Off Off -40.0dB Auto 0ms Pattern1 Natural
(Radio Treble: 0.0dB
Listening)
En 49
PLAYBACK
SOURCE RECEIVER
Enjoying favorite sound field effect

This unit is also equipped with a Yamaha digital sound field processing (DSP) chip. Multi-channel playback from almost any audio source can be enjoyed using a variety
AV of sound decoders and various sound field effect programs stored on the chip. Sound field effect programs built into this unit are called “sound programs.”
1 2 3 4
5 6 7 V-AUX
1 2
AUDIO
3 4
Selecting sound programs and Turning on Pure Direct Mode (☞p. 52): Enjoying surround sound with the
Press rPURE DIRECT
PHONO MULTI USB NET sound decoders CINEMA DSP function
DOCK TUNER [A] [B] Turning on Compressed Music Enhancer
(☞p. 52):
This unit offers sound programs in many different
Press sENHANCER repeatedly ■ Enjoying sound programs without
categories suitable for movies, music and other uses.
surround speakers
Choose a sound program that sounds best with the Sound program categories
PROGRAM
f source you are playing back, rather than relying on the This unit allows you to use virtual surround speakers to
name or explanation of the program. enjoy sound field surround effects, even without any
Movie MOVIE surround speakers (Virtual CINEMA DSP mode). You
VOLUME
Sound programs are stored for each input source. can even enjoy surround sound presence with just a
When you change the input source, the sound Sci-Fi minimal configuration of the front speakers only.
program previously selected for that input source is This unit will switch to Virtual CINEMA DSP mode
Program
applied again. automatically when Surround is set to “None” in
• You can use the speaker indicators on the front panel Configuration (☞p. 95). J2
Selecting sound program (☞p. 53): display to check what speakers are currently
CLASSICAL category: Press rCLASSICAL outputting sound (☞p. 11).
■ Enjoying sound programs with
LIVE repeatedly J1 • You can adjust sound field elements (sound field
headphones
CLASSICAL CLUB ENTERTAIN
Even when headphones are connected, you can enjoy the

MOVIE STEREO STRAIGHT r LIVE/CLUB category: Press rLIVE/CLUB parameters) for each of the programs (☞p. 87).
repeatedly J1 reproduction sound field presence with ease (SILENT
PURE
DIRECT
ENTERTAIN category: Press rENTERTAIN CINEMA mode). J3

repeatedly J1
MOVIE category: Press rMOVIE repeatedly J1
Selecting stereo reproduction (☞p. 52):
Press rSTEREO repeatedly J1
Selecting surround decoder:
SUR.
DECODE ENHANCER
s Press sSUR. DECODE repeatedly J1
Turning on Straight decoding mode (☞p. 51):
Press rSTRAIGHT
TUN./CH
J 1 : A sound program, stereo reproduction option or sound decoder J 2 : However, Virtual CINEMA DSP mode is not available under the J 3 : However, SILENT CINEMA mode is not available under the
can also be selected by pressing fPROGRAM k / n. following conditions: following conditions:
• When headphones are connected to this unit. • When a “2ch Stereo” sound program is selected.
• When a “7ch Stereo” or “2ch Stereo” sound program is • When Pure Direct Mode or straight decoding mode is selected.
selected.
• When Pure Direct Mode or straight decoding mode is selected.
En 50
PLAYBACK
SOURCE RECEIVER
■ Enjoying more spatial sound fields ■ Enjoying sound programs without Enjoying unprocessed playback
(CINEMA DSP 3D mode) presence speakers (Straight decoding mode)
1 2
AV
3 4
CINEMA DSP 3D mode creates an intensive and This unit allows you to use virtual presence speakers to
accurate stereoscopic sound field in the listening room. create an intensive and accurate stereoscopic sound field,
5 6 7 V-AUX
Use straight decoding mode when you want to playback
AUDIO
Connection of presence speakers is recommended to even when no presence speakers are connected (Virtual
1 2 3 4 sound without sound field processing. You can playback
take full advantage of the effects of CINEMA DSP 3D CINEMA DSP 3D mode). You can even enjoy surround
PHONO MULTI USB NET
as follows in straight decoding mode.
DOCK TUNER [A] [B]
mode. Do the following steps. J1 sound presence with front speakers, center speaker, and
• Connect the presence speakers to the EXTRA SP1 jacks surround speakers. 2-channel sources such as CD
and set the speakers to use (☞p. 20). This unit automatically switches to Virtual CINEMA Stereo sound plays through the front left and right
• Enable CINEMA DSP 3D in the Option menu (☞p. 57). DSP 3D mode when presence speakers are not available. speakers.
Do the following steps. Multi-channel playback sources such as BD/
When a sound program runs in CINEMA DSP 3D mode,
• At minimum, connect the front speakers, center speaker, DVD
the CINEMA DSP 3D indicator on the front panel lights
and surround speakers. Plays back audio from a playback source without
up.
• Enable the center speaker and surround speakers in applying sound field effects, using an appropriate
“Configuration” (☞p. 94). decoder to split the signal into multiple channels.
Music CLASSICAL • Enable CINEMA DSP 3D in the Option menu (☞p. 59).
VOLUME
Press rSTRAIGHT to enable the straight

HallinVienna decoding mode.
Lights up
STRAIGHT VOLUME

STRAIGHT
r
To disable straight decoding mode, press
rSTRAIGHT again.
Movie MOVIE VOLUME
Sci-Fi
Previously selected program
J 1 : However, CINEMA DSP 3D mode is not available under the

following conditions:
• When headphones are connected to this unit.
• When a “7ch Stereo” or “2ch Stereo” sound program is
selected.
• When Pure Direct Mode or straight decoding mode is selected.
En 51
PLAYBACK
SOURCE RECEIVER
Enjoying Hi-Fi Sound Quality (Pure Enjoying stereo playback Enjoying compressed music source
Direct Mode) with better sound quality
AV
Select “2ch Stereo” from the sound programs when you
1 2 3 4
want to playback 2-channel stereo sound (from the front

(Compressed Music Enhancer)
5 6 7 V-AUX
Use Pure Direct Mode to enjoy the pure high fidelity
1 2
AUDIO
3 4 sound of the selected source. When Pure Direct Mode is speakers only), regardless of the playback source.
Selecting “2ch Stereo” will playback as follows for the Compressed Music Enhancer improves the sound quality
PHONO MULTI USB NET enabled, this unit plays back the selected source with the of the compressed music source closer to its original
DOCK TUNER [A] [B]
least circuitry. J1 playback of CD and BD/DVD sources.
depth and width. J3
2-channel sources such as CD This mode can be used along with any other DSP modes.
Press rPURE DIRECT to turn Pure Direct Mode Stereo sound plays back through the front speakers.
on. J2 Press sENHANCER to turn Compressed Music
Multi-channel sources such as BD/DVD
To disable Pure Direct Mode, press Playback channels other than the front channels in the Enhancer on.
rPURE DIRECT again. playback source are mixed with the front channels and
played back through the front speakers.
EnhancerOn VOLUME
ENHANCER
Press rSTEREO repeatedly to select “2ch

Stereo.” Lights up when the Compressed Music Enhancer is
active
Music STEREO VOLUME
To disable Compressed Music Enhancer, press

2chStereo sENHANCER again.
CLASSICAL LIVE ENTERTAIN
CLUB
MOVIE STEREO STRAIGHT r To disable stereo playback, press any of the

PURE
DIRECT
rSound selection keys to select a sound program
other than “2ch Stereo.”
ENHANCER
s
TUN./CH
J 1 : The following features are disabled in Pure Direct Mode. J 2 : While Pure Direct Mode is on, the front panel display screen turns J 3 : However, Compressed Music Enhancer is not available in the
• sound program, tone control, PEQ Select, and Adaptive DRC off in order to reduce noise. When turning Pure Direct Mode off, following audio:
• displaying and operating the Option menu and ON SCREEN the screen returns on. • Signals of which sampling rate is over 48kHz
menu • High Definition stream
En 52
PLAYBACK
Sound programs ■ Category: ENTERTAINMENT

Sound programs are optimized for video sources such as TV programs and games.
in the table indicates the sound program for CINEMA DSP. Sports This program allows the listeners to enjoy stereo sport broadcasts and studio variety
programs with enriched live feeling. In sports broadcasts, the voices of the commentator and
sportscaster are positioned clearly at the center while the atmosphere of the stadium expands
■ Category: CLASSICAL in an optimal space to offer the listeners a feeling of presence in the stadium.
This sound field is suitable when listening to music sources such as CDs.
Action Game This sound field is suitable for action games such as car racing, fighting games and FPS
games. The reality of, and emphasis on, various effects makes the player feel like they are
Hall in Munich This sound field simulates a concert hall with approximately 2500 seats in Munich, using
right in the middle of the action, allowing for greater concentration.
stylish wood for the interior finishing as normal standards for European concert halls. Fine,
Use this program in combination with Compressed Music Enhancer for a more dynamic and
beautiful reverberations spread richly, creating a calming atmosphere. The listener’s virtual
strong sound field.
seat is at the center left of the arena.
Roleplaying Game This sound field is suitable for role-playing and adventure games. This program adds depth
Hall in Vienna This is an approximately 1700-seat, middle-sized concert hall with a shoebox shape that is
to the sound field for natural and realistic reproduction of background music, special effects
traditional in Vienna. Pillars and ornate carvings create extremely complex reflections from
and dialogue from a wide variety of scenes.
all around the audience, producing a very full, rich sound.
Use this program in combination with Compressed Music Enhancer for a more clear and
Hall in Amsterdam The large, shoe box shaped hall seats about 2200 around the circle stage. Reflections are spatial sound field.
rich and pleasing while the sound travels freely.
Music Video This sound field offers an image of a concert hall for live performance of pop, rock and jazz
Church in Freiburg Located in the south of Germany, this grand, stone-built church has a pointed tower at 120 music. The listener can indulge oneself in a hot live space thanks to the presence sound field
meters in height. Its long and narrow shape and the high ceiling enable the elongated that emphasizes the vividness of vocals and solo play and the beat of rhythm instruments,
reverberation time and limited initial reflection time. Thus, the rich reverberation rather than and to the surround sound field that reproduces the space of a big live hall.
the sound itself reproduces the atmosphere of the church.
Recital/Opera This program controls the amount of reverberations at an optimum level and emphasizes the
Church in Royaumont This program features the sound field created by the refectory (dining hall) of a beautiful depth and clarity of human voices. “Recital/Opera” offers the reverberations of an orchestra
medieval Gothic monastery located in Royaumont on the outskirts of Paris. box in front the listener at the same time as providing the acoustic positioning and feeling of
presence on the stage. The surround sound field is relatively moderate, but the data for
Chamber This program creates a relatively wide space with a high ceiling like an audience hall in a
concert hall effects are used to represent the inherent beauty of music. The listener will not
palace. It offers pleasant reverberations that are suitable for courtly music and chamber music.
be fatigued even after long hours of opera entertainment.
■ Category: LIVE/CLUB
This sound field is suitable when listening to music sources such as CDs.
Village Vanguard The Jazz club is on 7th Avenue, New York. This small club with the low ceiling makes the
powerful reflections converge toward the stage located in the center.
Warehouse Loft The warehouse resembles some lofts in Soho. Sound reflects off the concrete walls clearly
with a lot of energy.
Cellar Club This program simulates a live house with a low ceiling and homey atmosphere. A realistic,
live sound field features powerful sound as if the listener is in a row in front of a small stage.
The Roxy Theatre This is the sound field of a rock music live house in Los Angeles, with approximately 460
seats. The listener’s virtual seat is at the center left of the hall.
The Bottom Line This is the sound field at stage front in The Bottom Line, a famous New York jazz club once.
The floor can seat 300 people to the left and right in a sound field offering real and vibrant
sound.
En 53
PLAYBACK
■ Category: MOVIE ■ Category: STEREO

Sound programs optimized for viewing video sources such as movies. Sound programs are optimized for listening to stereo sources.
Standard This program creates a sound field emphasizing the surround feeling without disturbing the 2ch Stereo Use this program to mix down multi-channel sources to 2-channels. When multi-channel
original acoustic positioning of multi-channel audio such as Dolby Digital and DTS. It has signals are input, they are down mixed to 2-channels and output from the front left and right
been designed with the concept of an ideal movie theater, in which the audience is speakers.
surrounded by beautiful reverberations from the left, right and rear.
7ch Stereo Use this program to output sound from all speakers. When you playback multi-channel
Spectacle This program represents the spectacular feeling of large-scale movie productions. It sources, this unit down-mixes the source to 2-channels, and then outputs the sound from all
reproduces a broad theater sound field that matches cinemascope and wider-screen movies speakers. This program creates a larger sound field and is ideal for background music at
with an excellent dynamic range providing everything from very small sound effects to parties, etc.
large, impressive sounds.
Sci-Fi This program clearly reproduces the finely elaborated sound design of the latest science ■ Category: SUR.DECODE (Surround decode mode)
fiction and special effects-featuring movies. You can enjoy a variety of cinematographically Select this program to playback sources with selected decoders. You can playback 2-channel audio
created virtual spaces reproduced with clear separation between dialogue, sound effects and
sources in up to 7-channels using a surround decoder.
background music.
Adventure This program is ideal for precisely reproducing the sound design of action and adventure q Pro Logic Reproduces sound using the Dolby Pro Logic decoder. This is suitable for all kinds of audio
movies. The sound field restrains reverberations but puts emphasis on reproducing a sources.
powerful space expanded widely to the left and right. The reproduced depth is also
q PLIIx Movie / Reproduces sound using the Dolby Pro Logic IIx (or Dolby Pro Logic II) decoder. This is
restrained relatively to ensure the separation between audio channels and the clarity of the
q PLII Movie suitable for movies. J1
sound.
q PLIIx Music / Reproduces sound using the Dolby Pro Logic IIx (or Dolby Pro Logic II) decoder. This is
Drama This sound field features stable reverberations that match a wide range of movie genres from
q PLII Music suitable for music. J1
serious dramas to musicals and comedies. The reverberations are modest but offer an
optimum 3D feeling, reproducing effects tones and background music softly but cubically q PLIIx Game / Reproduces sound using the Dolby Pro Logic IIx (or Dolby Pro Logic II) decoder. This is
around clear words and center positioning in a way that does not fatigue the listener even q PLII Game suitable for games. J1
after long hours of viewing.
Neo:6 Cinema Reproduces sound using the DTS Neo:6 decoder. This is suitable for movies.
Mono Movie This program is provided for reproducing monaural video sources such as a classic movie in
Neo:6 Music Reproduces sound using the DTS Neo:6 decoder. This is suitable for music.
an atmosphere of a good old movie theater. The program produces the optimum expansion
and reverberation to the original audio to create a comfortable space with a certain sound
depth.
J 1 : You cannot select the Dolby Pro Logic IIx decoder in the following conditions:
• When “Surround Back” is set to “None” (☞p. 95).
• When headphones are connected.
En 54
PLAYBACK
SOURCE RECEIVER
Using the TV display to control this unit

This unit features a sophisticated on-screen display (OSD) that helps you to control the amplifier function of this unit. With the OSD, you can view information of the
AV signals being input and the status of this unit. Visual guidance simplifies operations for menus.
1 2 3 4
5 6 7 V-AUX
AUDIO
Basic operations via the TV screen Use iCursor D / E to select a Input source Use iCursor D / E to select a scene and
2 2
1 2 3 4
PHONO MULTI USB NET display press iENTER. press iENTER.

DOCK TUNER [A] [B]
The input source is selected. The scene is selected.

A TV screen is required to display the ON SCREEN
or Option menu. Refer to “Connecting a TV monitor”
for instructions on connecting a TV screen (☞p. 27).
h
This section describes basic operations for configuring
ON SCREEN
“Input,” “Scene” and “Sound Program” using the OSD.
ENTER
i Press hON SCREEN.
RETURN
The ON SCREEN menu is displayed on the TV screen.
• Pressing iRETURN displays the previous menu • Pressing iRETURN displays the previous menu
■ Selecting an input source screen. Press iRETURN repeatedly to close the ON screen. Press iRETURN repeatedly to close the ON
SCREEN menu. SCREEN menu.
Use iCursor B / C to select “Input” and
1 press iENTER.
• In addition to selecting an input source, detailed
settings for each input source can be configured. Refer
• Refer to “Changing input settings with a single key
(SCENE function)” (☞p. 49) for details on the default
to “Configuring input sources (Input menu)” (☞p. 81) scene settings.
for details. • Detailed SCENE function settings can be edited. Refer
to “Editing the SCENE function (Scene menu)”
■ Selecting a scene (☞p. 84) for details.
Use iCursor B / C to select “Scene” and

1 press iENTER.
Input source icons are displayed at the bottom of the

TV screen.
Scene icons are displayed at the bottom of the TV

screen.
En 55
PLAYBACK
Using the TV display to control this unit
SOURCE RECEIVER
■ Selecting a sound program NOTES

Menus can be operated and the status of this unit
Use iCursor B / C to select “Sound
1
5
2
6
AV
7
4
V-AUX
1 Program” and press iENTER.
confirmed from the following three main displays.
• ON SCREEN menu (☞p. 81)
AUDIO
1 2 3 4 • Option menu (☞p. 57)

PHONO MULTI USB NET • Content window (☞p. 61)
DOCK TUNER [A] [B]
These menus and status features can be used to

configure more various functions in addition to
selecting “Input,” “Scene” and “Sound Program.”
Refer to each references for details on menus and
status.
Sound program icons are displayed at the bottom of the
TV screen.
ENTER
i
Use iCursor D / E to select a sound
RETURN
2 program and press iENTER.
The sound program is selected.
• Pressing iRETURN displays the previous menu

screen. Press iRETURN repeatedly to close the ON
SCREEN menu.
• Refer to “Enjoying favorite sound field effect” (☞p. 50)
for various sound programs.
• You can configure the detailed settings for each sound
program. Refer to “Setting sound program parameters
(Sound Program menu)” (☞p. 87) for details.
En 56
PLAYBACK
SOURCE RECEIVER
Configuring settings specific to an individual input source (Option menu)

This unit has a unique Option menu for each input source. Option menus can be used to enable features such as volume trim for compatible input sources or to display
AV audio/video data.
1 2 3 4
5 6 7 V-AUX
AUDIO
d Option menu display and setup Use iCursor B / C to select the desired Press pOPTION to close the Option menu.
3 5
1 2 3 4
PHONO MULTI USB NET

setting and press iENTER.
DOCK TUNER [A] [B] Option menu operations are displayed on the front panel
Parameters of the selected item are displayed.
display or TV screen. TV display is used here to explain
operation. The keys on the remote control may not respond for a
Use iCursor D / E to select the desired
Use dInput selector to select an input 4 item (or enable a function).
few seconds after the Option menu is closed. Should
1 source to which options will be applied.

• Press iRETURN to display the previous screen or
this occur, select the input source again.
close the Option menu.

Press pOPTION.
ENTER
OPTION
p
i
2 The Option menu is displayed.
• The Option menu may close automatically when some
functions are enabled.
RETURN Option menu
The displayed Option menu settings differ depending

on the input source.
For more information, refer to the “Option menu” on
the next page.
En 57
PLAYBACK
Option menu
The following items are provided for each input source. “✓” indicates the available menu for each input source. J1
DOCK
AV1-4 AV5-7 V-AUX AUDIO1-4 PHONO MULTI CH USB PC NET RADIO DOCK (iPod) TUNER
(Bluetooth)
Tone Control ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓
Adaptive DRC ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓
CINEMA DSP ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓
3D Mode
Dialogue ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓
Lift J2
Extended ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ J3
Surround
Volume Trim ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓
Video ✓ ✓ ✓ J4 ✓ J4
Adjustment
Audio Select ✓ ✓ ✓ J3 ✓ J3
Shuffle ✓ ✓ ✓ J5
Repeat ✓ ✓ ✓ J5
Connect ✓
Disconnect ✓
Pairing ✓
J 1 : When “Tone Control,” “Adaptive DRC,” “CINEMA DSP 3D Mode,” input source is displayed. J 4 : This function can be set only when “Component” is assigned to this input
“Dialogue Lift,” or “Extended Surround” is adjusted for an input source, the J 2 : “Dialogue Lift” can be adjusted only when the presence speakers are available. source from “Input Assignment” in the Setup menu. Refer to “Assigning
same value is applied to other input sources and “ALL” is displayed on the J 3 : This function is only available when “Coax/Opt” is assigned to this input component input and output jacks” for details (☞p. 106).
front panel display. When settings specific to a certain input source are source from “Input Assignment” in the Setup menu. Refer to “Assigning J 5 : Not available for Yamaha Wireless System for iPod.
selected, the input source name is displayed on the front panel display. If the component input and output jacks” for details (☞p. 106).
name of the input source has been changed (☞p. 82), the original name of the
En 58
PLAYBACK
■ Adjusting high/low-frequency sound ■ Enjoying more spatial sound fields • “Dialogue Lift” can be adjusted only when the presence speakers
are available.
Tone Control CINEMA DSP 3D Mode
• You cannot move the dialogue position lower than the default
You can adjust the balance of the high-frequency range (Treble) When CINEMA DSP 3D is enabled, set whether to use sound setting.
and low-frequency range (Bass) of sounds output from the front programs in CINEMA DSP 3D mode (☞p. 51).
left and right speakers to obtain desired tone.
■ Adjusts the vertical position of dialogues ■ Selecting the 5.1-channel signal playback
Adjustable range -6.0 dB to +6.0 dB method
Dialogue Lift
Adjustment 0.5 dB
Extended Surround
increments Adjusts the vertical position of center sound such as dialogues
when presence speakers are used. Increasing this parameter raises Selects whether to reproduce 5.1-channel input signals in 6.1- or
■ Auto-adjusting the sound level to make the position. 7.1-channel when surround back speakers are used. J2
even low volumes more audible Auto (Default) Automatically selects the most suitable decoder if a
flag for reproducing surround back channel is present,
Adaptive DRC and reproduces the signals in 6.1- or 7.1-channel.
The ideal dialogue
Adjusts the dynamic range in conjunction with the volume level position q PLIIx Movie Always reproduces signals in 7.1-channel using the
(from minimum to maximum). When this item is set to “On,” Dolby Pro Logic IIx Movie decoder whether or not
dialogue and sound effects are clearer. J1 surround back channel signals are contained. You can
select this parameter when two surround back
Off (Default) Does not adjust the dynamic range automatically. speakers are connected.
If the dialogue seems to come out from a lower position than the
On Adjusts the dynamic range automatically. video monitor screen, increase this parameter. q PLIIx Music Always reproduces signals in 6.1- or 7.1-channel
using the Dolby Pro Logic IIx Music decoder whether
or not surround back channel signals are contained.
When “On” is selected, the dynamic range is adjusted as follows.
You can select this parameter when one or two
surround back speakers are connected.
If the volume level is low, the dynamic range is narrow.
EX/ES Automatically selects the most suitable decoder for
If the volume level is high, the dynamic range is wide.
Move up to the ideal input signals whether or not the flag for reproducing
dialogue position surround back channel is present, and always
Output Level
Output Level
reproduces signals in 6.1-channel.

On
On “0” (default) corresponds to the lowest position and “5” to the Off Always reproduces original channels whether or not
the flag for reproducing surround back channel is
Off Off highest position.
present.
Input Level Input Level
Volume: low Volume: high
J 1 : “Adaptive DRC” is also effective when you use headphones.

J 2 : AV5-6 or AUDIO1-2 are available when “Audio Return Channel” is on, and
the input source is used for “TV Audio Input.”
En 59
PLAYBACK
■ Adjusting volume between input sources ■ Selecting audio input jacks ■ Repeat playback
Volume Trim Audio Select Repeat
Reduces any change in volume when switching between input Select the audio input jack through which source signal is input Plays songs or albums repeatedly. When the repeat function is
sources by correcting volume differences in each input source. You when an input source is connected to more than one jack. enabled, “ (Single / One[iPod])” or “ (All)” appears on
can adjust this parameter for each input source. the TV screen. J1
Auto (Default) Automatically selects input signal in the following
Adjustable range -6.0 dB to +6.0 dB order: Off The repeat function is turned off.
(1) HDMI Single / One[iPod] Plays a song back repeatedly.
Default setting 0.0 dB
(2) Digital signal
All When all songs have completed playback, returns to
Adjustment 0.5 dB steps (3) Analog signal
the start and repeats playback.
increments
HDMI Selects only HDMI signal. When no HDMI signal is
input, no sound is output. ■ Connect / Disconnect Bluetooth
■ Selecting a video adjustment preset Coax/Opt Selects only coaxial or optical signal. When no signal component
is input, no sound is output.
Video Adjustment Connect
Analog Selects only analog signal. If no analog signal is
Selects the desired “Adjustment” (☞p. 100) preset to be applied to input, no sound is output.
the selected input source. Disconnect
■ Shuffle playback Switches communication with a Bluetooth component on and off
(☞p. 77).
Shuffle
■ Pairing Bluetooth component
Plays back songs or albums in random order. When the shuffle
function is enabled, “ ” appears on the TV screen. J1
Pairing
Off The shuffle function is turned off. Performs pairing of this unit and a Bluetooth component (☞p. 77).
On J2 The shuffle function is tuned on.
Songs J3 Plays songs back in random order.
Albums J3 Plays albums back in random order.
J 1 : Not available for Yamaha Wireless System for iPod.

J 2 : This item is displayed only when PC or USB is selected as input source.
J 3 : This item is displayed only when DOCK (iPod) is selected as input source.
En 60
PLAYBACK
SOURCE RECEIVER
Confirming and operating input sources from the content window

When USB, NET, DOCK or TUNER is selected, the content window is displayed on the TV screen. Playback style for iPod, functions for FM/AM tuner, Internet Radio,
AV PC, and USB can be set in the content window.
1 2 3 4
5 6 7 V-AUX c Screen button area

1 2
AUDIO
3 4
A TV screen is required to display the content Buttons to operate each input source are displayed here. • In the Browse view, press iCursor E and use
window. Refer to “Connecting a TV monitor” for These buttons vary depending on the selected input. For iCursor B / C to select the icon. Then
PHONO MULTI USB NET
d
DOCK TUNER [A] [B]
instructions on connecting a TV monitor (☞p. 27). details on operations for each input, see the following. press iENTER to switch to the Now Playing
– FM/AM stations (☞p. 64) view.
– PC servers (☞p. 67)
Displaying the content window on – USB storage (☞p. 69) Browse view
– Internet Radio (☞p. 71)
the TV screen – iPod (☞p. 74)
• In the Now Playing view, press iENTER and use

Press dUSB, dNET, dDOCK or dTUNER to iCursor B / C to select a button. Then press
display the content window. iENTER to execute the selection.
ENTER
i The content window consists of two main displays, the • In the Browse view, press iCursor E and use
Now Playing view and the Browse view. iCursor B / C to select a button. Then press
RETURN DISPLAY
q
Below is the example of the Now Playing view for DOCK iENTER to execute the selection.
(iPod). • Press iRETURN repeatedly to exit from the or or
operation.
qDISPLAY qDISPLAY
Now Playing view
Switching the display between the

Now Playing view and the Browse
view
You can switch the display between the Now Playing
view and the Browse view by the following methods.
a b c When selecting “DOCK (iPod)” as input source and
• Press qDISPLAY to cycle between the Now
a Image display playing back video content of iPod/iPhone, the screen
Playing view and the Browse view.
Icon for each input source or album art is displayed. switches as follows by pressing qDISPLAY
b Information display • In the Now Playing view, press iENTER and repeatedly.
Information on the current input source is displayed.
use iCursor B / C to select the icon. Now Playing view → Browse view →
Then press iENTER to switch to the Browse Video playback screen (content window disappears)
view. → Now Playing view
En 61
PLAYBACK
SOURCE RECEIVER
FM/AM tuning
AV
When using the FM/AM tuner, adjust the direction of Selecting a frequency for reception
Press PROGRAM h repeatedly to display (Normal tuning)
the FM/AM antenna connected to this unit to get the
3
1 2 3 4
5 6 7 V-AUX
best reception. “TUNER FRQ STEP.”
AUDIO
1 2 3 4
Press dTUNER to switch to the tuner input.

TUNER FRQ STEP
1
PHONO MULTI USB NET
DOCK TUNER [A] [B]

d (Asia and General models only)
The factory pre-set FM/AM tuner frequency steps are AM9/FM50
9 kHz for AM and 50 kHz for FM. Press xFM or xAM to select a band to
Carry out the following settings and select the
frequency steps suitable for your listening 4 Press STRAIGHT repeatedly to select a
frequency steps.
2 receive.
environment.
Switch this unit to the standby mode, and
FM87.50MHz
5
VOLUME
Switch this unit to the standby mode. then switch it on again.

ENHANCER

1 The power turns on, with the settings you made
configured. Continues to the
Press MAIN ZONE A while pressing and next page
2 holding STRAIGHT on the front panel.
Release the keys when “ADVANCED SETUP” is
displayed on the front panel display.
After approximately a few seconds, the top menu
items are displayed. J1
MAIN ZONE A STRAIGHT
FM AM
x
TUN./CH
PROGRAM l / h
J 1 : Refer to the “Extended functionality that can be configured as

needed (Advanced Setup menu)” (☞p. 121) for details on the
Advanced Setup menu.
En 62
PLAYBACK FM/AM tuning
SOURCE RECEIVER
Use xTUN./CH H / I to set a frequency to ■ Registering stations manually (Manual ■ Designating a preset number for
1 2
AV
3 4
3 receive. Preset)
Select stations manually and register them as presets
registration
Press xMEMORY once, to display “Manual Preset”
xTUN./CH H
5 6 7 V-AUX individually. on the front panel display. After a small wait, the
AUDIO Increases the frequency. Press and hold this key for
1 2 3 4 preset number that the station has been registered to
longer than a second to search automatically for a station
Tune in to the station you want to will appear. J3
1
PHONO MULTI USB NET
on a higher frequency than the current one. J1

DOCK TUNER [A] [B]
register, referring to “Selecting a
xTUN./CH I The newly registered frequency
frequency for reception (Normal tuning).”
Decreases the frequency. Press and hold this key for
longer than a second to search automatically for a station Use one of the following methods to Preset 01:FM 98.50MHz
on a lower frequency than the current one. J1 2 register the station you are currently
receiving.
STEREO TUNED
ENHANCER
01:Empty
VOLUME
Lights up when a broadcast is received

from a station
■ Registering to a preset number to which Blinks Empty, or the frequency
registered most
no station is registered Preset number previously

STEREO TUNED
FM98.50MHz Press xMEMORY for 3 seconds or longer.
STEREO TUNED VOLUME
The station will be registered automatically to the Press jPRESET F / G to select the preset number
RETURN
i
ENHANCER
lowest open preset number (or the next number after to register the station to, and then press xMEMORY
Lights up when a stereo broadcast is received the one registered most recently). to register.
■ Entering a frequency number Registered frequencies

To select a registered station, press
In normal tuning mode, use the uNumeric keys to jPRESET F / G to select the preset number
PRESET
j
enter a frequency. Leave the decimal point out when Preset 01:FM98.50MHz of the station. J4
STEREO TUNED VOLUME
entering a number. J2
For example, enter as follows to select a station on
ENHANCER
Memorized
98.50 MHz.
9 8 5 0
or
9 8 5 ENT
MEMORY
x
1 2 3
TUN./CH
4 5 6
7 8 9
u
0 ENT
J 1 : When searching for a station, release the key once the search has J 3 : Press iRETURN or wait with no operation for 30 seconds to J 4 : To select a station by selecting a preset number, use the
started. exit the Manual Preset mode. uNumeric keys to enter the preset number of the station you
J 2 : “Wrong Station!” appears on the front panel display when you want to listen. When an invalid number is entered, “Wrong Num.”
enter a frequency that is out of receivable range. Make sure that appears on the front panel display. Check that you have entered
the frequency entered is correct. the correct number.
En 63
PLAYBACK FM/AM tuning
SOURCE RECEIVER
Navigating the FM/AM tuner from g Screen button area

Buttons for available operations are displayed. See Preset Select
the content window “Screen buttons on the Now Playing view” for details.
1 2
AV
3 4
You can call preset stations.
5 6 7 V-AUX
The station currently received can be confirmed from the Screen buttons on the Now Playing view Preset - Selects the previous preset number.
AUDIO
1 2 3 4 menu displayed on the TV screen. Various FM/AM tuner To use these buttons, first press iENTER. Then select
Preset + Selects the next preset number.
PHONO MULTI USB NET
operations can be performed from the content window the desired one with iCursor B / C and iENTER.
DOCK TUNER [A] [B]
d rather than controls on the front panel display. The Preset -8 Returns the previous page.
content window is displayed when dTUNER is Manual Tuning Preset +8 Goes to the next page.
pressed. You can tune in to a desired FM/AM station by Memory Registers the station currently received as
You can operate the FM/AM tuner from the Now specifying its frequency. a preset station. Up to 40 FM/AM stations
Playing view or the Browse view. can be registered.
FM Switches a band to FM.
■ Operating from the Now Playing Direct Selects a station directly by entering the
AM Switches a band to AM. preset number.
view
Tuning - Decreases the frequency.
ENTER
i a b Tuning + Increases the frequency. Utility
c Auto - Automatically searches for a station on a
e lower frequency than the current station. FM Mode
d Selects “Stereo” or “Mono” when
receiving the FM station (☞p. 62).
Auto + Automatically searches for a station on a
g higher frequency than the current station.
Direct Selects the frequency manually.

Scroll
Memory Registers the station currently received as
a preset station. Up to 40 FM/AM stations Switches the scroll target.
f can be registered.
Browse
a Tuned indicator
Lights up when a station is received. Switches the display to the Browse view.
b Stereo indicator
Lights up when a stereo broadcast is received. When “FM
Mode” is set to “Mono,” the indicator does not light.
c Preset number
The selected preset number is displayed.
d Band
The selected band (FM or AM) is displayed.
e Frequency
The frequency currently received is displayed.
f Frequency guide
The frequency currently received is displayed as a cursor
on the bar.
En 64
PLAYBACK
FM/AM tuning
SOURCE RECEIVER
■ Operating from the Browse view

1 Page Up
AV
1 2 3 4
1 Page Down
5 6 7 V-AUX
AUDIO
1 2 3 4
Scrolls the list to the next or previous page.
PHONO MULTI USB NET
DOCK TUNER [A] [B]
Now Playing
Switches the display to the Now Playing view.
a b
a Preset station list
The list of preset stations is displayed.
b Screen button area
Buttons for available operations are displayed. See
ENTER
i “Screen buttons on the Browse view” for details.
Screen buttons on the Browse view

To use these buttons, first press iCursor E. Then
select the desired one with iCursor B / C and
iENTER.
Utility
Auto Preset Detects FM stations with a strong signal

and automatically registers up to 40 FM
stations, beginning with the next number
after the current number (☞p. 64). AM
stations cannot be registered by using
“Auto Preset.”
Clear Preset Clears registration of the preset station

highlighted in the preset station list
(☞p. 64).
Clear All Preset Clears registration of all preset stations.
En 65
PLAYBACK
SOURCE RECEIVER
Playing back tunes on the PC

You can enjoy playback of audio files stored on PCs connected to this unit via your network. To play back audio files on your PC, you need to install Windows Media
AV Player on the PC and configure the media sharing setting of Windows Media Player.
1 2 3 4
5 6
AUDIO
7 V-AUX
If you do not use a DHCP server, configure the Playback of PC music contents Screen buttons on the Browse view
1 2 3 4 To use these buttons, first press iCursor E. Then
network parameters (IP address, etc.) of this unit
PHONO MULTI USB NET
d select the desired one with iCursor B / C and
manually (☞p. 103).
DOCK TUNER [A] [B]
For a complete list of status messages that appear on iENTER.
the front panel display and GUI screen, see “USB and
10 Pages Up
Windows Media Player setup Network” (☞p. 136).
The PC music contents can be operated from the menu 10 Pages Down
Install Windows Media Player on your PC.
1 You can download the installer of Windows Media
displayed on the TV screen.
You can operate the PC contents from the Now Playing
Goes to 10 pages forwards or backwards.
Player from the Microsoft website, or use the upgrade view or the Browse view.
i function of the installed Microsoft Windows Media 1 Page Up
ENTER
Player.
RETURN
1 Page Down
Turn on your PC then allow media sharing. a b c
2 Activate Windows Media Player first, enable the media
sharing and then select this unit as a device to which

the media is shared. d Now Playing
e
g Switches the display to the Now Playing view.
NOTES f
• Some security software installed on your PC (anti-
Press dNET repeatedly to select “PC” as
virus software, firewall software, etc.) may block the
access of this unit to your PC. In such cases, configure 1 the input source.
the security software appropriately. h
Press iCursor B / C to select a PC server
• You can connect this unit to up to 16 PC servers, and
each server must be connected to the same subnet as a Repeat icon 2 and music file to play back.
this unit. b Shuffle icon • To select a PC server, folder or file, press
c Play icon iCursor B / C.
d Current directory name • To confirm the selection, press iENTER.
e Menu items • To return to the previous menu, press iRETURN.
f Album art / Input icon
Press iENTER to start playback.
g Screen button area
“Screen buttons on the Browse view” for details.
3 The Now Playing view appears during playback.
h Current menu number / Number of all menu items
En 66
PLAYBACK
Playing back tunes on the PC
SOURCE RECEIVER
■ Operating from the Now Playing Screen buttons on the Now Playing view ■ Compatibility of Digital Media
view To use these buttons, first press iENTER. Then select Controller
AV the desired one with iCursor B / C and iENTER. A DLNA-compliant Digital Media Controller (DMC)
1 2 3 4
a b c device can also be used to control music playback. Refer

5 6 7 V-AUX
Play Control
AUDIO to “Using a PC to control this unit over a network”
1 2 3 4
Operates the basic playback functions of PC. (☞p. 83) for details. J1, J2
PHONO MULTI USB NET
DOCK TUNER [A] [B]

e p (Play) Starts playback. CAUTION
f s (Stop) Stops playback.
When DMC controls are used to adjust volume,
d g playback volume may be unexpectedly loud. This
e (Pause) Stops playback temporarily. could result in damage to this unit or the speakers.
h “Max Volume” can be used to specify the maximum
b (Skip -) Skips to the beginning of the currently
i playing song. Press iENTER at the volume level to prevent excessively loud playback
beginning of the song to skip to a previous (☞p. 98).
song.
ENTER
a
i b
Repeat icon a (Skip +) Skips to the beginning of the next song. ■ Operating basic playback functions
Shuffle icon
with the remote control
c Play icon
d Album image
Use the following remote control keys to operate
Scroll (playback, stop, skip, etc.) your PC contents.
e Artist name
g f Album title Switches the scroll target (artist name, album title, or
g Screen button area song title). gp Play
Buttons for available operations are displayed. See gs Stop
“Screen buttons on the Now Playing view” for details. Browse
h Song title
ge Switches between playback and pause.
i Elapsed time Switches the display to the Browse view. ga Skip forward during playback
• You can switch the information displayed on the front gb Skip backward during playback
panel display by pressing tINFO (☞p. 11).
• Album images are available only when the file ■ Shuffle/repeat playback
contains image data. Use the Option menu to apply playback shuffle and
repeat settings. Refer to “Shuffle playback” (☞p. 60)
and “Repeat playback” (☞p. 60) for details.
INFO
t
TUN./CH
J 1 : A shortcut button cannot be registered when a DMC is used.

J 2 : Set “DMC Control” to “Disable” to automatically play back the
last song played when this unit is turned on.
En 67
PLAYBACK
SOURCE RECEIVER
Playing back tunes on the USB storage devices

You can enjoy playback of WAV (PCM format only), MP3, WMA, MPEG-4 AAC and FLAC files stored on your USB memory device or USB portable player connected
AV to the USB port on the front panel of this unit. This unit supports USB mass storage class devices (FAT 16 or FAT 32 format, except USB HDDs).
1 2 3 4
5 6
AUDIO
7 V-AUX
• You can play back only the files stored in the first Playback of the USB storage device 10 Pages Up
1 2 3 4
partition.
PHONO MULTI USB NET
d
• Some files may not be playable depending on models The USB storage device can be operated from the menu
DOCK TUNER [A] [B]
displayed on the TV screen. 10 Pages Down

and types of USB storage devices.
• For a complete list of status messages that appear on You can operate the contents of USB storage device Goes to 10 pages forwards or backwards.
the front panel display and GUI screen, see “USB and from the Now Playing view or the Browse view.
Network” (☞p. 136).
• This unit is compatible with sampling frequency of up
■ Operating from the Browse view 1 Page Up
to 48 kHz for the USB storage device. If you have connected the USB storage device to this
unit before, playback of the music file played at the last 1 Page Down
time automatically starts.
ENTER
i
a b c
RETURN
Now Playing
d Switches the display to the Now Playing view.

e
g
Connect your USB storage device to the
f
1 USB port on the front panel (☞p. 38).
Rotate the INPUT selector (or press dUSB)

h 2 to select “USB” as the input source.
a Repeat icon
Press iCursor B / C / D / E to select a
b
c
Shuffle icon
Play icon
3 music file to play back.
d Current directory name • To select a file or folder, press iCursor B / C.
e Menu items • To confirm the selection, press iENTER.
f Input icon • To return to the previous menu, press iRETURN.
h
Current menu number / Number of all menu items
4 The Now Playing view appears during playback.
Screen buttons on the Browse view

select the desired one with iCursor B / C and
iENTER.
En 68
PLAYBACK
Playing back tunes on the USB storage devices
SOURCE RECEIVER
■ Operating from the Now Playing ■ Operating basic playback functions

view Play Control with the remote control
1 2
AV
3 4
Operates the basic playback functions of USB. Use the following remote control keys to operate
5 6 7 V-AUX
a b c (playback, stop, skip, etc.) USB storage device.
AUDIO
s (Stop) Stops playback.
1 2 3 4
b (Skip -) Skips to the beginning of the currently gp Play

PHONO MULTI USB NET
playing song. Press iENTER at the gs

DOCK TUNER [A] [B]
e beginning of the song to skip to a previous
Stop
f song.
ga Skip forward during playback
d g a (Skip +) Skips to the beginning of the next song.

gb Skip backward during playback
h
i ■ Shuffle/repeat playback
Scroll Use the Option menu to apply playback shuffle and
Switches the scroll target (artist name, album title, or repeat settings. Refer to “Shuffle playback” (☞p. 60)
a Repeat icon song title). and “Repeat playback” (☞p. 60) for details.
ENTER
i b Shuffle icon
c Play icon Browse
d Album image
Switches the display to the Browse view.
e Artist name
g f Album title
“Screen buttons on the Now Playing view” for details.
h Song title
i Elapsed time
• You can switch the information displayed on the front

panel display by pressing tINFO (☞p. 11).
• Album images are available only when the file
contains image data.
Screen buttons on the Now Playing view

To use these buttons, first press iENTER. Then select
INFO
t
the desired one with iCursor B / C and iENTER.
TUN./CH
En 69
PLAYBACK
SOURCE RECEIVER
Listening to the Internet Radio

You can listen to Internet Radio stations using the vTuner Internet Radio station database service particularly customized for this unit, providing a database of over 2000
AV radio stations. Also, you can store your favorite stations with bookmarks.
1 2 3 4
5 6
AUDIO
7 V-AUX
• To use this feature, your network must be connected to

1 2 3 4 10 Pages Up
the Internet.
PHONO MULTI USB NET
d
DOCK TUNER [A] [B]
• A narrowband Internet connection (i.e. 56K modem, a 10 Pages Down
ISDN) will not provide satisfactory results, and a
broadband connection is strongly recommended (i.e. a Goes to 10 pages forwards or backwards.
cable modem, an xDSL modem, etc.). For detailed b
information, consult with your ISP. c 1 Page Up
• If you do not use a DHCP server, configure the
d e
network parameters (IP address, etc.) of this unit
manually (☞p. 103). 1 Page Down
• Some security devices (such as firewall) may block the
ENTER
i f Scrolls the list to the next or previous page.
access of this unit to Internet Radio stations. In such
RETURN
cases, configure the security settings appropriately.
• This service may be discontinued without notice. a Play icon Now Playing
• Some Internet Radio stations may not be played. b Current directory name
c Menu items Switches the display to the Now Playing view.
d Album art / Input icon
Listening to Internet Radio e Press dNET repeatedly to select “NET
Screen button area
1 RADIO” as the input source.
For a complete list of status messages that appear on f Current menu number / Number of all menu items Press iCursor B / C to select an item to
the front panel display and GUI screen, see “USB and
Network” (☞p. 136). Screen buttons on the Browse view
2 play back.
• To select an item, press iCursor B / C.
To use these buttons, first press iCursor E. Then • To confirm the selection, press iENTER.
The Internet Radio can be operated from the menu select the desired one with iCursor B / C and • To return to the previous menu, press iRETURN.
displayed on the TV screen. iENTER.
You can operate the Internet Radio from the Now
Playing view or the Browse view. Bookmark On 3 The Now Playing view appears during playback.
The selected Internet Radio station is added to the
Bookmarks list in “NET RADIO.”
Bookmark Off
This item is displayed in the bookmark directory.
The selected Internet Radio station is removed from the
Bookmarks list.
En 70
PLAYBACK
Listening to the Internet Radio
SOURCE RECEIVER
■ Operating from the Now Playing

view Browse
1 2
AV
3 4
5 6
AUDIO
7 V-AUX
a ■ Operating basic playback functions
1 2 3 4
with the remote control
PHONO MULTI USB NET
DOCK TUNER [A] [B]

Use the following remote control keys to operate
(playback, stop) the Internet Radio.
b e gp Play
gs Stop
You can also register your favorite Internet Radio

cd stations on this unit by accessing the website with the
a Play icon
web browser on your PC. To use this feature, you
ENTER
i b Album image
need the vTuner ID of this unit and your e-mail
c Elapsed time
address to create your personal account. For details,
g d Current station name
refer to the help information on the website.
e Screen button area
Buttons for available operations are displayed. See URL: http://yradio.vtuner.com/
“Screen buttons on the Now Playing view” for details.
NOTE
You can switch the information displayed on the front To clear the personal account such as vTuner ID or e-
panel display by pressing tINFO (☞p. 11). mail address, perform “NETWORK” of
“INITIALIZE” in the Advanced Setup menu
Screen buttons on the Now Playing view (☞p. 123).
the desired one with iCursor B / C and iENTER.
Bookmark On
The station currently being played back is added to the
Bookmarks list in “NET RADIO.”
INFO
t
Play Control
TUN./CH
The following operation is available.
s (Stop) Stops playback.
En 71
PLAYBACK
SOURCE RECEIVER
Using shortcut function

Use this feature to access the desired music sources This unit stores the relative position of the preset items
Press jPRESET F / G or uNumeric keys
1
5
2
6
AV
7
4
V-AUX
(WAV, MP3 and WMA files on the connected PC or
USB storage devices and Internet Radio Stations) 3 to select the preset number that you want to
assign.
in a directory or playlist, and does not recall the correct
item by using uNumeric keys if you add or delete
AUDIO directly. You can preset up to 40 items for above input music files to or from the same directory or playlist as
1 2 3 4
sources. the preset items. In such cases, preset the desired item to
PHONO MULTI USB NET
MemoryPreset the preset numbers again.
■ Assigning the items to the preset number
VOLUME
DOCK TUNER [A] [B]
09:Empty We recommend the following methods:

Select a desired content you want to assign USB storage devices
1 to a preset number, and then play back the
content.
Valid numbers as the preset number are “01” to “40.” Create several directories containing the desired content
in a directory beside the directory containing all music
files, and then assign the top item of each directory to a
Press xMEMORY. Press xMEMORY.
2 This unit automatically selects an empty preset number 4 The following display appears on the front panel
preset number. To change the content assigned to preset
numbers, replace the content in the directory to new
and the following display appears. display and the preset content is set. content without deleting the directory.
PC server
i
MemoryPreset MemoryPreset
RETURN
VOLUME VOLUME
Create eight playlists containing the desired content, and
then assign the top item of each playlist to a preset
01:Empty 09:Memorized number. To change the content assigned to preset
Preset number (Blinks) numbers, replace the content registered with a playlist
■ Selecting the item assigned to the preset
j with new content without deleting the playlist.
PRESET
• To automatically assign the selected content to an number

empty preset number, press and hold xMEMORY for Press jPRESET F / G to select the preset
at least 2 seconds with step 2. In this case, the number to which the desired item is assigned to
following steps are unnecessary. select the item as the input source.
• To cancel the preset, press iRETURN. This unit starts the playback of the source assigned to the
• When you do not complete each of the following steps selected numeric button.
within 30 seconds, the memory preset mode is
automatically canceled. In this case, start over from NOTES
step 2. • “xx:Empty” appears on the front panel display when
you select the preset number to which no items are
MEMORY
x assigned.
1 2 3 • This unit does not recall the correct item assigned to
TUN./CH
4 5 6
u the selected preset number in the following cases:
7 8 9 – the connected USB device is incorrect.
0 – the PC which stores the selected item is turned off
or disconnected from the network.
– the selected Internet Radio station is temporary
unavailable or out of service.
– the directory of the selected item has been changed.
En 72
PLAYBACK
SOURCE RECEIVER
Playing back tunes from your iPod™/iPhone™

Once you have connected a Universal Dock for iPod (such as the YDS-12, sold separately) to this unit, you can enjoy playback of your iPod/iPhone using the remote
AV control supplied with this unit. When playing back from an iPod/iPhone, you can also use the compressed music enhancer sound programs to give compressed audio
1 2 3 4
formats such as MP3 a sharper, more dynamic sound (☞p. 52). A Yamaha Wireless System for iPod (YID-W10, sold separately) can also be connected to this unit to play
5 6 7 V-AUX
AUDIO back iPod/iPhone with wireless connection.

1 2 3 4
PHONO MULTI USB NET
• When playing back iPod/iPhone with wired

Switch this unit on and place your iPod/iPhone in the Controlling an iPod™/iPhone™
DOCK TUNER [A] [B]
d dock. The unit is now ready for playback.
connection
Refer to “Connecting the Universal Dock for iPod.” After setting your iPod/iPhone in your dock, just press
iPodconnected dDOCK to switch to DOCK input to play your iPod/
VOLUME
• When playing back iPod/iPhone with iPhone.

wireless connection The iPod/iPhone can be operated in the following two
Refer to “Playing iPod™/iPhone™ with wireless ways.
DOCK NETWORK
connection” (☞p. 75).

AV 1 AV 2 AV 3 AV 4
Menu browse control:
(1 BD/DVD)
Plays the iPod/iPhone while viewing the menu displayed

Connecting the Universal Dock for PHONO
GND
on the TV. Refer to “Playing iPod™/iPhone™ from the

iPod menu screen (Menu browse control)” (☞p. 74).
Simple remote control:
Use the dedicated cable to connect the dock to the a COAXIAL b COAXIAL c OPTICAL d OPTICAL
Plays audio and video through this unit while viewing
INFO
t Universal Dock
the menu displayed on the iPod/iPhone screen. Refer to
DOCK jack on the rear panel of this unit. Refer to the for iPod
TUN./CH operating instructions of the Universal Dock for iPod for ANTENNA
FM (4 RADIO)GND AM
“Operating basic playback functions via the remote
75
information on how to connect your iPod/iPhone. control (Simple remote control)” (☞p. 75).
• iPod touch, iPod (4th Gen/5th Gen/Classic), iPod • Song information (artist, album, song) is displayed on
nano, iPod mini, iPhone, iPhone 3G, and iPhone 3GS the front panel. Press tINFO repeatedly to display
are supported (As of March 2010). subsequent/previous information when displaying
• When connecting iPhone, iPhone 3G and iPhone 3GS, Locate the wireless dock at the distance as far as Now Playing view in Menu browse control.
use a YDS-12. from the unit. • The Yamaha logo is displayed on the iPod screen
• Some features may not be compatible depending on when iPod stationed in the Universal Dock for iPod
the model or the software version of your iPod/iPhone. (does not apply to the iPod touch or iPhone). However,
When this unit is in standby mode, iPod/iPhone can be the Yamaha logo is not displayed in Simple remote
• Some functions may not be available for some
charged automatically (☞p. 83). control.
Universal Dock for iPod models. This explanation
focuses on the YDS-12. • Manual control of the iPod/iPhone is not possible
while the iPod stationed in the Universal Dock for
iPod and Menu browse control is displayed.
CAUTION
To prevent accidents, switch this unit to standby mode
before connecting the Universal Dock for iPod.
En 73
PLAYBACK
SOURCE RECEIVER
Playing iPod™/iPhone™ from the Screen buttons on the Browse view

Press iCursor B / C to select iPod/iPhone
AV
menu screen (Menu browse
select the desired one with iCursor B / C and 3 menu items, and press iENTER to play.
1 2 3 4
control) iENTER. The Now Playing view appears during playback. J2
5 6 7 V-AUX
1 2
AUDIO
3 4
The iPod/iPhone can be operated from the menu 10 Pages Up ■ Operating from the Now Playing
PHONO MULTI USB NET
displayed on the TV screen.
view
DOCK TUNER [A] [B]
d 10 Pages Down
You can operate the iPod/iPhone from the Now Playing
view or the Browse view. Goes to 10 pages forwards or backwards.
a b c
1 Page Up e
a b c f
1 Page Down d g
h
ENTER
i d Scrolls the list to the next or previous page.
k
e i
f g Now Playing
j
Switches the display to the Now Playing view. a Repeat icon
b Shuffle icon
h c Play icon
Close d Album image
e Artist name
a Repeat icon Returns to the video playback, turning off the menu f Album title
b Shuffle icon display. g Screen button area
c Play icon
d Current directory name
Press dDOCK to switch to the DOCK input. “Screen buttons on the Now Playing view” for details.
e
f
Menu items
Input icon
1 h
i
Song title
Remaining time
g Screen button area j Progress bar
Press iCursor B / C to select the content
“Screen buttons on the Browse view” for details. 2 (music or video) that you want to play, and
k Elapsed time
h Current menu number / Number of all menu items press iENTER. J1
J 1 : Videos will not be displayed when your iPod or Universal Dock

for iPod do not support the browser function for browsing video
files.
J 2 : When selecting the video content, the following display is not
displayed.
En 74
PLAYBACK
SOURCE RECEIVER
Screen buttons on the Now Playing view Operating basic playback functions Playing iPod™/iPhone™ with
AV the desired one with iCursor B / C and iENTER. via the remote control (Simple wireless connection
1 2 3 4
remote control)
5 6
AUDIO
7 V-AUX
Play Control A Wireless System for iPod (YID-W10, sold separately)
1 2 3 4
Use the following remote control keys to operate can be connected to this unit to play back iPod/iPhone
Operates the basic playback functions of iPod/iPhone.
PHONO MULTI USB NET
(playback, stop, skip, etc.) your iPod/iPhone. with wireless connection. The iPod/iPhone can be used
DOCK TUNER [A] [B]
d p (Play) Starts playback. as the remote control. J1
Press gREC to enable the Simple remote control.
s (Stop) Stops playback. Press gREC again to return to the Menu browse
■ Connecting the Wireless System
e (Pause) control.
Stops playback temporarily. for iPod and playing back iPod/
b (Skip -) Skips to the beginning of the currently dDOCK Switches to the DOCK (iPod) input.
iPhone
playing song. Press iENTER at the Use the dedicated cable to connect the receiver of the
beginning of the song to skip to a iCursor B / C Move the cursor up and down to different
Wireless System for iPod to the DOCK jack on the rear
previous song. fields.
panel of this unit. Refer to the operating instructions of
a (Skip +) Skips to the beginning of the next song. iRETURN Returns to the previous menu. the YID-W10 for more information.
ENTER
i
w (Scan -) Searches backwards. iENTER Confirms the selected menu.
CAUTION
RETURN
f (Scan +) Searches forwards. gw Searches backwards while held down. To prevent accidents, unplug the power cable of this
REC
gf Searches forwards while held down. unit before connecting the receiver of the Wireless
g gb Skips to the beginning of the currently
System for iPod.
Scroll
playing song. Pressing repeatedly skips
Switches the scroll target (artist name, album title, or one song backwards with each press.
song title). ga Skips to the beginning of the next song. Continues to the
next page
gs Stops playback.
Browse
ge Switches between playback and pause.
gp Switches between playback and pause.
Close gREC Switches the control method between the
Returns to the video playback, turning off the menu Menu browse control and Simple remote
control.
display.
J 1 : Video signals cannot be transmitted wirelessly.
En 75
PLAYBACK
SOURCE RECEIVER
Place the iPod/iPhone in the wireless transmitter. Setup Use iPod/iPhone to start playback. • Adjusting volume control on the iPod/iPhone also adjusts
is complete. the volume (max 0.0 dB) of this unit.
• When “iPod Interlock” → “Volume” in the Input menu

AV
1 2 3 4
iPodconnected
5 6 7 V-AUX VOLUME is set to “Off,” the volume of this unit is not adjusted
AUDIO
1 2 3 4 when iPod/iPhone volume controls are adjusted

PHONO MULTI USB NET (☞p. 83).
DOCK TUNER [A] [B]
d • This unit may restrict the volume level to prevent
NETWORK
excessively loud play back. In such a case, gradually

AV 1
(1 BD/DVD)
AV 2 AV 3 AV 4
increase the volume level.
PHONO
GND
CAUTION
• This unit, which is placed in the main zone, functions as When iPod/iPhone controls are used to adjust volume,
Receiver of the Wireless follows when iPod/iPhone controls are used to start playback volume may be unexpectedly loud. This
System for iPod a COAXIAL b COAXIAL c OPTICAL d OPTICAL
playback. could result in damage to this unit or the speakers. If
– The input source switches to DOCK (iPod) when this the volume suddenly increases during playback,
ANTENNA
FM (4 RADIO)GND AM
75
unit is turned on. immediately remove the iPod/iPhone from the
– When this unit is in standby mode when iPod/iPhone Wireless System for iPod. “Max Volume” can be used
B
12
3
playback starts, this unit turns on and the input source to specify the maximum volume level to prevent
A
switches to DOCK (iPod). J1 excessively loud playback (☞p. 98).

• This unit automatically enters standby mode when the
Position the receiver as far as possible from the following operations are performed.
unit.
– iPod/iPhone is removed from the YID-W10
– iPod/iPhone is not operated for a while after playback
When this unit is in standby mode, iPod/iPhone can be is stopped
charged automatically, if “Standby Charge” is set to
“Auto” (☞p. 83) or “Power & Input” of “iPod Interlock” • Pressing dDOCK also switches the input source to
is set to “On” (☞p. 83). DOCK (iPod).
• When a menu is operated, this function is not
activated.
• When “iPod Interlock” → “Power & Input” in the
Input menu is set to “Off,” the power and the input
source do not switch automatically (☞p. 83).
J 1 : This function is also activated when sound of application is

reproduced or ringtone is received.
En 76
PLAYBACK
SOURCE RECEIVER
Playing back tunes from Bluetooth™ components

You can connect a Yamaha Bluetooth Wireless Audio Receiver (such as the YBA-10, sold separately) to this unit and enjoy wireless playback from Bluetooth-compatible
AV portable music players. J1
1 2 3 4
5 6 7 V-AUX
1 2
AUDIO
3 4
NOTE
PHONO MULTI USB NET
When playing back from a Bluetooth component for the first time, you must first pair the devices (register the Bluetooth components). When establishing a wireless connection
DOCK TUNER [A] [B]
d you must carry out pairing on both this unit and on the Bluetooth component.
Connecting a Yamaha Bluetooth Pairing Bluetooth™ components Press iENTER to start pairing.
Wireless Audio Receiver
Be sure to carry out pairing when connecting a Bluetooth
4
component for the first time, or when settings have been deleted.
Use the dedicated cable to connect the dock to the
Refer to the operating instructions of your Bluetooth
Searching... VOLUME
OPTION
p DOCK jack on the rear panel of this unit.
The Bluetooth Wireless Audio Receiver connection will component as necessary when carrying out pairing.
ENTER
i be complete when this unit is turned on. • To cancel pairing, press iRETURN.
The Yamaha Bluetooth Wireless Audio Receiver can
RETURN
be paired with up to eight Bluetooth components. • You can also press and hold xMEMORY on the front
NETWORK
When the ninth device is paired, the pairing settings panel to begin pairing.
AV 1
(1 BD/DVD)
AV 2 AV 3 AV 4 for the device which has not been used for the longest
x period of time will be deleted. Make sure the Bluetooth component
5
MEMORY
PHONO
GND
TUN./CH
recognizes the Bluetooth Wireless Audio
Receiver.
Press dDOCK to switch to the DOCK input.
Yamaha Bluetooth
Wireless Audio Receiver
a COAXIAL b COAXIAL c OPTICAL d OPTICAL 1 When the device is recognized, it will appear in the
Bluetooth component list, for example as “YBA-10
YAMAHA.”
Turn on the Bluetooth component you want
2
ANTENNA
FM (4 RADIO)GND AM
75
to pair with and set it to pairing mode.

Select the Bluetooth Wireless Audio
Press pOPTION to display the Option menu
6 Receiver from the Bluetooth component
3 and use iCursor B / C to select “Pairing.”
list, and enter a pass key “0000” into the
Bluetooth component. J2
CAUTION Option When pairing occurs correctly
VOLUME
To prevent accidents, switch this unit to standby mode
before connecting a Bluetooth Wireless Audio Receiver. Pairing Completed VOLUME
J 1 : This unit supports A2DP (Advanced Audio Distribution Profile)

of the Bluetooth profile.
J 2 : Depending on Bluetooth components, wireless connection is
carried out right after the pairing. In this case, “BT connected” is
displayed instead of “Completed.”
En 77
PLAYBACK
Playing back tunes from Bluetooth™ components
SOURCE RECEIVER
Using Bluetooth™ components Use iCursor B / C to select “Connect” and
1 2
AV
3 4
When pairing is complete, perform the following
3 press iENTER. J1
5 6 7 V-AUX
procedure to achieve a wireless connection between this When wireless connection is complete
1 2
AUDIO
3 4
unit and the Bluetooth component. When the wireless
connection is complete, Bluetooth components can be BTconnected
PHONO MULTI USB NET VOLUME
DOCK TUNER [A] [B]

d played back.
Depending on Bluetooth components, a wireless
“Not found” is displayed when there is an error
connection is established automatically or by
connecting. Check that the following conditions have
operating the Bluetooth components. In that case, it is
been satisfied, and try to establish a wireless
not necessary to carry out the following procedure.
connection again.
• Both this unit and the Bluetooth component are paired.
OPTION
p • The Bluetooth component is switched on.
Press dDOCK to switch to the DOCK input.
ENTER
i 1 • The Bluetooth component is within 10 m of the
Bluetooth Wireless Audio Receiver.
Press pOPTION to display the Option

2 menu.
Press pOPTION to exit the Option menu.
4
Operate the Bluetooth component for
5 playback.
To disconnect a wireless connection, repeat the same

steps, and in step 3, select “Disconnect.”
J 1 : “Disconnect” is displayed when a Bluetooth component has been

connected.
En 78
PLAYBACK
Controlling this unit by using the web browser (Web Control Center)
Displaying and operating Web Control • To use this feature, this unit and your PC must be connected
Top menu
Center properly in the network. Refer to “Connecting to the network” for

details on the connections (☞p. 37).
You can operate this unit by using a web browser. You can select • We recommend that you use Windows Internet Explorer 8 that is d
installed on Windows XP or Windows 7 PC to access this unit. a
the input source and sound field program, browse the iPod or e
network/USB contents, select the preset items, and adjust the • You can select whether this unit accepts the controls by using the
parameters of this unit by using the graphical user interface (Web web browser when this unit is in the standby mode. f
Control Center) that appears in the web browser. Check the IP • You can register the MAC address of the PCs you want to use to b
control this unit and limit the PCs that can control this unit by
address of this unit by using “IP Address” in “Network” menu g
(☞p. 103) in advance, and then enter the IP address to the web using the web browser. You can select that this unit allows the
access to this unit by the PCs whose MAC addresses are
c
browser to access this unit to control it.
registered to this unit or allows the access by any PCs by using a CONTROL
NOTE Changes the display to the zone control menu (☞p. 80).
“MAC Address Filter” in the “Network” setup (☞p. 103).
When “Network Standby” is set to “On” in the Network menu, b SETTINGS
this unit can turns on and Web Control Center can be displayed Changes the display to the settings menu (☞p. 80).
Features of Web Control Center for each zone c PARTY MODE
on the PC even if this unit was in standby mode (☞p. 103).
Enables/disables the party mode (☞p. 104).
When “Network Standby” is set to “Off,” we recommend that Feature Main Zone Zone2/Zone3 d SYSTEM POWER
“Network Standby” is set to “On” to use Web Control Center. Turns on/off the power for all zones.
Power on/off ✓ ✓
e STATUS
Sleep timer ✓ ✓ Turns on/off the power for each zone, and displays the selected input
PC source and volume level for each zone.
Input select ✓ ✓
f MAIN VOLUME
Volume adjustment ✓ ✓ Adjusts the volume level or mutes the sound for the main zone. You
Web browser can also switch the step for the volume control.
Mute on/off ✓ ✓
Control
g RELOAD
Content/channel select ✓ ✓ Reloads the current status of the receiver.
Sound program ✓ —
Party Mode on/off ✓ ✓
Required settings for web browser ✓ ✓

control
• Selecting the input source

• Controlling Network/USB features
• Power on/off
• Adjusting the system parameters
• Any many other features...
En 79
PLAYBACK
Controlling this unit by using the web browser (Web Control Center)
Zone control menu Settings menu
You can control the selected zone. You can make various settings regarding the web browser control.
c a
a d
b
c
d
e e
f
b f
g h
a PLAY INFO
Controls the selected input for each zone. a Zone Rename
b TOP MENU Friendly Name indicates the identification name of the device (this
Returns to the top menu. unit) connected to the PC.
c SCENE keys Friendly Name or the names of zones can be changed.
Selects the scene. b MAC Filter
d POWER Applies the MAC address filter to this unit. Web Control Center can
Turns on/off the power for the selected zone. You can also set the only be accessed from a computer with the same address as the MAC
sleep timer for the selected zone. address registered here.
e VOLUME c Auto Reload
Adjusts the volume level or mutes the sound for the main zone. You Enables or disables the Auto Reload function which reloads the
can also switch the step for the volume control. current status of the receiver every 5 minutes.
f RELOAD d Tips 1/Tips 2
Reloads the current status of the receiver. Displays the tips for use of Web Control Center.
e Create Link
Customizes the display of Web Control Center.
f iPhone J1
Selects the zoom rate for iPhone.
g BACK
Returns to the top menu.
h RELOAD
Reloads the current status of the receiver.
J 1 : This item appears only when accessing the Web Control Center with the
iPhone.
En 80
SOURCE RECEIVER
SETUP
Configuring input sources (Input menu)
AV
Settings, such as the name of an input source or the icon displayed for an input source can be changed from the Input menu.
1 2 3 4
5 6
AUDIO
7 V-AUX
Configuring input sources Use iCursor D / E to select an input source Use iCursor B / C to adjust the setting.
3 5
1 2 3 4
PHONO MULTI USB NET to be configured and press iCursor B.

DOCK TUNER [A] [B]
The name of an input source and its icon, as well as other
input source settings, can be changed from the Input Pressing iRETURN displays the previous menu
menu displayed on the TV screen. screen. Repeat steps 4 to 5 to adjust multiple settings.
Press hON SCREEN.

1 Press hON SCREEN to close the menu.
h
6
ON SCREEN
ENTER
i
Use iCursor B / C to select an item and
RETURN
4 press iENTER.
Settings
Use iCursor B / C to select “Input” and

2 press iENTER.
If the selected item contains additional items, use

iCursor B / C to select the desired item and press
iENTER.
En 81
SETUP
SOURCE RECEIVER
Input menu
✓:
AV
1 2 3 4
available menu for each input source
5 6 7 V-AUX
AUDIO DOCK DOCK

1 2 3 4 AV1-7 V-AUX AUDIO1-4 PHONO MULTI CH USB PC NET RADIO TUNER
(iPod) (Bluetooth)
PHONO MULTI USB NET
DOCK TUNER [A] [B]

Rename/Icon Select ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓
Decoder Mode ✓ ✓ ✓
Enhancer ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓
DMC Control ✓
Standby Charge ✓
iPod Interlock ✓ J1
Video Out ✓
ENTER
i
■ Changing an input source name or
Use iCursor D / E to choose an icon. Press iCursor C to select “OK” and press
icon
2 7 iENTER to register the new input name.
Rename/Icon Select
Press iCursor C and iENTER. • To cancel the operation without applying changes,
Changes the input source name (up to nine characters)
and icon displayed on the front panel display or TV
3 Editing the name is available.
select “CANCEL” and then press iENTER.
• To clear the characters entered in step 5, select
screen. “CLEAR” and press iENTER.
Press iCursor B / C to select a character,
Use iCursor B / C repeatedly to select
4 and press iCursor D / E to enter the
1 “Rename/Icon Select” and press iENTER.
selected character.
Repeat step 4 to enter the desired input

5 source name.
Confirm the input source name by pressing

6 iENTER.
J 1 : Not available when playing back iPod/iPhone with wired

connection.
En 82
SETUP
■ Setting the format of digital audio signals ■ Using a PC to control this unit over a ■ Setting the interlock functions with iPod/
network iPhone (when the receiver of the Wireless
Decoder Mode System for iPod is connected)
DMC Control
Sets the format of digital audio to playback to DTS. For example, if
iPod Interlock
the format is not automatically detected correctly even during This unit can be operated via the DLNA compatible controller
playback of DTS format audio, this item can be used to set the (e.g., Windows Media Player, etc.) to the same network as this unit. This unit can be automatically operated in conjunction with
playback format to DTS. DMC stands for “Digital Media Controller.” operations on iPod when the receiver of the Wireless System for
iPod is connected to this unit.
Auto (Default) The audio format is automatically selected to match Disable Disables the DMC control function.
the format of the input audio. Power & Input Starting playback of iPod/iPhone turns on this unit
Enable (Default) Enables the DMC control function.
DTS Selects DTS signals only. Other input signals are not and switches the input source to DOCK (iPod)
automatically when this item is set to “On.” This unit
reproduced.
■ Charging an iPod™/iPhone™ in standby automatically enters standby mode when iPod/iPhone
mode
■ Selecting the sound program suitable for
is not operated for a while after playback is stopped.
This interlock function is disable with “Off.”
listening to compressed audio, such as Standby Charge Volume Adjusting the volume on the iPod/iPhone also adjusts
MP3
Charges an iPod/iPhone stationed in the Universal Dock for iPod or the volume of this unit when this item is set to “On.”
This interlock function is disable with “Off.”
Enhancer the receiver of the Wireless System for iPod while the receiver is in
standby mode.
Turns on/off the Compressed Music Enhancer. ■ Outputting a video signal input from
Auto (Default) This unit charges iPod/iPhone when this unit is in another input source while playing a
Off Turns off the Compressed Music Enhancer. standby mode. While charging an iPod/iPhone, the multi-channel audio signal
On Turns on the Compressed Music Enhancer. HDMI Through/iPod Charge indicator lights.
After the charging is complete, standby charge
Video Out
function is automatically off and the HDMI Through/
iPod Charge indicator goes off. J1 When “MULTI CH” is selected as the input source, a video signal
Off This unit does not charge iPod/iPhone. input from another terminal can be output to the video monitor. For
example, even if an audio and video component such as a DVD
player that does not support a multi-channel digital audio output,
the video signal can be output to the video monitor while
reproducing a multi-channel analog audio signal.
J 1 : Standby charge function automatically turns off only when using YDS-10/11/
12.
En 83
SETUP
SOURCE RECEIVER
Editing the SCENE function (Scene menu)

The SCENE function (☞p. 49) can be edited from the Scene menu displayed on the TV screen.
AV
1 2 3 4
5 6 7
Editing a scene Use iCursor D / E to select a scene to be Use iCursor B / C / D / E to adjust the
3 5
V-AUX
AUDIO
1 2 3 4
edited and press iCursor B. setting.
PHONO MULTI USB NET Various settings, such as the name of a scene or the icon
DOCK TUNER [A] [B] displayed for a scene, can be changed from the Scene Pressing iRETURN displays the previous menu
menu. screen. Repeat steps 4 and 5 to adjust multiple
settings.
Press hON SCREEN.
1
Press hON SCREEN to close the menu.
ON SCREEN
h
6
ENTER
i Use iCursor B / C to select an item and
RETURN 4 press iENTER.
Settings
Use iCursor B / C to select “Scene” and

2 press iENTER.
If the selected item contains additional items, use

iCursor B / C to select the desired item and press
iENTER.
En 84
SETUP
Scene menu ■ Registering SCENE function settings Detail

Display details of settings registered with the SCENE function.
Save Items indicated with a check mark in “Setting” are loaded.
SCENE1
Save
Registers the settings currently applied to this unit for each Input Displays the “Input” and “Audio Select” settings
Load SCENE. ✓ registered with the SCENE function.
Rename/Icon Select
Reset ■ Adjusting settings registered with the HDMI Output
✓
Displays the HDMI output jack(s) registered with the
SCENE function.
SCENE function
SCENE2 Mode Displays the sound program registered with the
Save
Load
✓ SCENE function.
Load
Rename/Icon Select Sound Displays the “Tone Control,” “Adaptive DRC,” and
Loads input sources or sound programs that have been registered
Reset with the SCENE function, or specifies whether or not an external ✓ “Enhancer” settings registered with the SCENE
function.
SCENE3 component registered as the input source is automatically turned on
when a scene is selected. Surround Displays the “CINEMA DSP 3D Mode,” “Dialogue
Save
Lift,” and “Extended Surround” settings registered
Load
OK Loads items indicated with a check mark in with the SCENE function.
Rename/Icon Select
Reset “DETAIL.” Video Displays the “Video Processing” and “Video
CANCEL Cancels settings applied with “DETAIL.” Adjustment” settings registered with the SCENE
SCENE4 function.
Save DETAIL Specifies “SCENE IR” function and displays settings
Load registered with the SCENE function in detail. Volume Displays the volume setting registered with the
Rename/Icon Select For more information, see “SCENE IR” and “Detail” SCENE function.
Reset at right. Lipsync Displays the “Lipsync” and “Delay” settings
registered with the SCENE function.
SCENE IR Speaker Setup Displays the “Setting Pattern” and “PEQ Select”
Specify whether or not a Yamaha BD/DVD player or CD player settings registered with the SCENE function.
SCENE12
connected to this unit turns on automatically.
Save
Load
Off Disables the SCENE IR function.
Rename/Icon Select
Reset Yamaha BD/DVD Select this when a Yamaha BD/DVD player is
Player1 connected to this unit.
Scene 5 to 12 can also be edited in the Scene menu. Select Scene Yamaha BD/DVD Select this if the player dose not turn on when
5 to 12 in the Scene menu. Player2 “Yamaha BD/DVD Player1” is selected.
Yamaha CD Player Select this when a Yamaha CD player is connected to

this unit.
En 85
SETUP
SOURCE RECEIVER
■ Changing a scene name and icon Simple registering as the SCENE

Press iCursor C to select “OK” and press
1 2
AV
3 4
Rename/Icon Select 7 iENTER to register the new input name.
Use dInput selector to select the input
5
1
6
2
AUDIO
7
3
V-AUX
4
Changes the scene name and icon displayed on the front
d panel display or TV screen.
• To cancel the operation without applying changes,
select “CANCEL” and then press iENTER. 1 source you want to register.
PHONO MULTI USB NET • To clear the characters entered in step 4, select
Set the settings such as sound program,
DOCK
1
TUNER
2
SCENE
[A]
3
[B]
4 e
1 Use iCursor B / C repeatedly to select
“Rename/Icon Select” and press iENTER.
“CLEAR” and press iENTER.
2 Compressed Music Enhancer, or HDMI OUT
you want to register.
■ Resetting a scene
Use iCursor D / E to choose an icon.
2 Reset
The following settings can be registered with a
scene J1:
Restores all settings for the selected scene to their Input, Audio Select, HDMI Output, Sound Program,
default values. Pure Direct Mode, Tone Control, Adaptive DRC,
Compressed Music Enhancer, CINEMA DSP 3D
ENTER
i Mode, Dialogue Lift, Extended Surround, Video
Adjustment, Video Processing, Master Volume,
Lipsync, Setting Pattern, PEQ Select
Press iCursor C and iENTER. Press the eSCENE key until “SET
3 Editing the name is available. 3 Complete” appears on the front panel
display.
selected character.
SCENE4
SET Complete
VOLUME
Scene names may consist of up to 20 characters. Release the key when “SET Complete” is displayed
When changing “SCENE,” also change the external

Repeat step 4 to enter the desired scene
5 name.
component that the remote control operates
(☞p. 111).
Confirm the scene name by pressing

6 iENTER.
J 1 : Settings that are not checked in the Scene menu’s “Load” item are
not enabled when the corresponding scene key is pressed.
En 86
SETUP
SOURCE RECEIVER
Setting sound program parameters (Sound Program menu)

Sound effects can be adjusted from the Sound Program menu.
AV
1 2 3 4
5 6 7
Editing sound programs Use iCursor D / E to select a sound Use iCursor B / C / D / E to adjust the
3 5
V-AUX
AUDIO
1 2 3 4
program and press iCursor B. parameter and press iRETURN. J1
PHONO MULTI USB NET Adjust sound field elements (sound program parameters)
DOCK TUNER [A] [B] to achieve sound effects suited to the acoustics of audio/ Sound programs When there are multiple parameters in the selected
video sources or rooms if you are not satisfied with the sound program, repeat steps 4 and 5 to adjust other
results achieved with default sound program settings. parameters.
Follow the procedure described below to adjust sound
program parameters.
Press hON SCREEN to close the Sound
ON SCREEN
h
1 Press hON SCREEN. 6 Program menu.
■ To initialize sound program parameters

ENTER
i Press iCursor B / C to select “Sound
RETURN 2 Program” and press iENTER.
To set the parameters of the sound program back to
their default settings, use iCursor B / C repeatedly
Use iCursor B / C to select a parameter to select “Reset” in step 4 and press iENTER.
4 and press iENTER. When the following message is displayed, select
“OK” and press iENTER to initialize.
Sound program parameters
Settings
To cancel initializing, select “CANCEL” and press
iENTER when the message above is displayed.
J 1 : An asterisk (*) appears on the left of the sound field parameter

name displayed on the TV when you change the parameter from
its default setting.
En 87
SETUP
CINEMA DSP parameters Initial Delay Room Size
DSP Level Surround Initial Delay Surround Room Size
Change the effect level (level of the sound field effect to be added).
You can adjust the level of the sound field effect while checking the Surround Back Initial Delay Surround Back Room Size
sound effect. Initial delay. Presence, surround, and surround back sound field Room size. Presence, surround, and surround back room size.
initial delay. Changes the apparent size of the sound field by Adjusts the apparent size of the sound field. The larger the value,
Adjustable range -6 dB to +3 dB
adjusting the delay between the direct sound and the first reflection the larger the surround sound field becomes. As the sound is
Default setting 0 dB heard by the listener. The smaller the value, the smaller the sound repeatedly reflected around a room, the larger the hall is, the longer
field seems to the listener. the time between the original reflected sound and the subsequent
reflections. By controlling the time between the reflected sounds,
Adjust “DSP Level” as follows: Adjustable range 1 to 99 ms (Initial Delay) you can change the apparent size of the virtual venue. Changing
• The effect sound is too soft. 1 to 49 ms (Surround Initial Delay and Surround Back
this parameter from one to two doubles the apparent length of the
• There are no differences between effects of the sound programs. Initial Delay)
room.
→ Increase the effect level.
• The sound is dull. Adjustable range 0.1 to 2.0
Source sound
• The sound field effect is added too much.
Early
→ Reduce the effect level. reflections
Level
Level
Level
Source sound
Time Time Time Early

reflections
Level
Level
Level
Delay Delay Delay
Audio source
Time Time Time
Audio source
Reflection face
Small value = 1 ms Large value = 99 ms
When you adjust the initial delay parameters, we also

Small value = 0.1 Large value = 2.0
recommend that you adjust the corresponding room size
parameters likewise. When you adjust the room size parameters, we also recommend
that you adjust the corresponding initial delay parameters
likewise.
En 88
SETUP
Liveness Reverb Time Reverb Delay
Reverberation time. Adjusts the amount of time taken for the Reverberation delay. Adjusts the time difference between the
Surround Liveness dense, subsequent reverberation sound to decay by 60 dB at 1 kHz. beginning of the direct sound and the beginning of the
This changes the apparent size of the acoustic environment over an reverberation sound. The larger the value, the later the
Surround Back Liveness extremely wide range. Set a longer reverberation time to get more reverberation sound begins. A later reverberation sound makes you
sustaining reverberation sound, and set a shorter time to get feel as if you are in a larger acoustic environment.
Liveness. Surround and surround back liveness. Adjusts the
articulate sound.
reflectivity of the virtual walls in the hall by changing the rate at Adjustable range 0 to 250 ms
which the early reflections decay. The early reflections of an audio Adjustable range 1.0 to 5.0 s
source decay much faster in a room with acoustically absorbent
wall surfaces than in one which has highly reflective surfaces. A Source sound
Level
Reverberation Reverberation
room with acoustically absorbent surfaces is referred to as “dead,” Source sound
(dB)
while a room with highly reflective surfaces is referred to as “live.” Early reflections
This parameter lets you adjust the early reflection decay rate and
60 dB 60 dB 60 dB
thus the “liveness” of the room. Reverberation
Time Time Time Time
Rev. Time Rev. Time Rev. Time
Adjustable range 0 to 10
Short Long Rev. Delay
reverberation reverberation
Source sound Audio source

Live
Dead
Level
Level
Level
Small value = 1.0 s Large value = 5.0 s

Time Time Time
Small reflected Large reflected

sound sound
Small value = 0 Large value = 10
En 89
SETUP
Reverb Level
Parameters usable in certain sound Surround R Level
programs
Reverberation level. Adjusts the volume of the reverberation Adjusts the volume of the surround R channel. J2
sound. The larger the value, the stronger the reverberation
2ch Stereo only Adjustable range 0 to 100%
becomes.
Default setting 100%
Direct
Adjustable range 0 to 100%
Automatically bypasses the DSP circuit and tone control circuit
Source sound depending on the condition of tone control etc., when an analog Surround Back L Level
Level
audio source is played back. You can enjoy a higher quality sound.
Adjusts the volume of the surround back L channel. J2
Auto (Default) Outputs sound by bypassing the DSP circuit and tone
Rev. Level control circuit when both tone controls of “Bass” and
“Treble” are set to 0 dB. Default setting 35% (7.1-channel configuration)
50% (6.1-channel configuration)
Off Does not bypass the DSP circuit and tone control
circuit.
Time
Surround Back R Level
7ch Stereo only
Decode Type
Adjusts the volume of the surround back R channel. J2
Selects a surround decoder to be used with a sound program in the Center Level
MOVIE category. J1 Adjustable range 0 to 100%
Adjusts the center channel volume. J2
Default setting 35% (7.1-channel configuration)
PLIIx Movie Selects the Dolby Pro Logic IIx Movie (or Adjustable range 0 to 100% 50% (6.1-channel configuration)
PLII Movie Dolby Pro Logic II Movie) decoder.
Neo:6 Cinema Selects the Neo:6 (Cinema) decoder.
Front Presence L Level
Surround L Level Adjusts the volume of the front presence L channel. J2
Adjusts the volume of the surround L channel. J2
Adjustable range 0 to 100% Default setting 33%
J 1 : Surround decoders cannot be changed when used with the following MOVIE J 2 : Not displayed when speakers are set to be inactive.
and ENTERTAINMENT sound programs.
• Mono Movie
• Sports
• Action Game
• Roleplaying Game
En 90
SETUP
Front Presence R Level

Parameters usable in surround decoder Center Width
Adjusts the volume of the front presence R channel. J1 Spreads the center channel sound to the front left and right
Decode Type speakers to suit your needs or preferences. Set this parameter to 0
Adjustable range 0 to 100% for outputting the center sound from the center speaker only, or to 7
Selects a surround decoder.
Default setting 33% for outputting it from the front left/right speaker only.
Pro Logic Reproduces sound using the Dolby Pro Logic
decoder. This is suitable for all kinds of audio sources. Adjustable range 0 to 7
PLIIx Movie / Reproduces sound using the Dolby Pro Logic IIx (or Default setting 3
PLII Movie Dolby Pro Logic II) decoder. This is suitable for
movies. J2
Dimension
PLIIx Music / Reproduces sound using the Dolby Pro Logic IIx (or
PLII Music Dolby Pro Logic II) decoder. This is suitable for Adjusts the difference in level between the front sound field and
music. J2 the surround sound field. You can adjust the difference in level
PLIIx Game / Reproduces sound using the Dolby Pro Logic IIx (or created by the software being played back to obtain the preferred
PLII Game Dolby Pro Logic II) decoder. This is suitable for sound balance.
games. J2 The surround sound gets stronger as you make the value more
Neo:6 Cinema Reproduces sound using the DTS Neo:6 decoder. This negative, and the front sound gets stronger as you make the value
is suitable for movies. more positive.
Neo:6 Music Reproduces sound using the DTS Neo:6 decoder. This
Adjustable range -3 to +3
is suitable for music.
Default setting 0
Dolby PLIIx Music and Dolby PLII Music only
When Neo:6 Music is selected
Panorama
Center Image
Adjusts the soundscape of the front sound field. Sends front left/
right channels sounds to the surround speakers as well as the front Adjusts the front left and right channel output relative to the center
speakers for a wraparound effect. channel to make the center channel more or less dominant as
necessary.
Off (Default) Disables the effect.
Adjustable range 0.0 to 1.0
On Enables the effect.
Default setting 0.3
J 1 : Not displayed when speakers are set to be inactive.

J 2 : You cannot select the Dolby Pro Logic IIx decoder in the following conditions:
• When “Surround Back” is set to “None” (☞p. 95).
• When headphones are connected.
En 91
SETUP
SOURCE RECEIVER
Setting various functions (Setup menu)

Various settings, such as speaker volume or HDMI functions, can be changed from the Setup menu.
AV
1 2 3 4
5 6 7
Operating the Setup menu Setup menus
Use iCursor B / C to select an item and
4
V-AUX
AUDIO
1 2 3 4
Speaker Adjusts parameters for speakers, such as press iENTER.
PHONO MULTI USB NET speaker status, and volume adjustment for
Press hON SCREEN.
DOCK TUNER [A] [B]
1 Sound
each speaker (☞p. 93).
Sets functions related to audio output,

such as adjustment of maximum volume
2 “Setup” and press iENTER.
Video
and of dynamic range (☞p. 97).
Sets video output functions, such as video

h conversion settings (resolution and aspect
ratio) (☞p. 99).
ON SCREEN
HDMI Sets HDMI functions, such as the HDMI
i Control function and output destination
ENTER
When the selected item contains detailed ones, use
for HDMI sound (☞p. 100).
RETURN
iCursor B / C to select the detailed item and press
Network Sets network status, such as IP Address or iENTER.
MAC Address Filter (☞p. 103).
Multi Zone Sets multi-zone functions, such as

volume adjustment for speakers in the Use iCursor B / C / D / E to adjust the
3 Use iCursor D / E to select a menu and

press iENTER.
secondary zone (☞p. 104). 5 setting.
Function Sets functions such as the Auto Power
Down function, that make the unit easier Pressing iRETURN displays the previous menu
to use (☞p. 105). screen. Repeat steps 4 to 5 to adjust multiple settings.
Language Selects the language of the menus and
messages displayed on TV screen
Press hON SCREEN to close the menu.
(☞p. 108).
6
En 92
SETUP
Setup menu Manages settings for speakers Setting Pattern Registers two speaker setting patterns and switches
between the two.
Setting Data Copy Copies “Setting Pattern” data.
Speaker
Power Amp Assign Adds the extra speakers to the 7.1-channel speaker
Auto Setup
connection.
Manual Setup
Configuration Manually manages speaker configuration, such as
Sound speaker size (sound production capacity), and bass
Lipsync audio processing.
Dynamic Range
Distance Manually adjusts the output of each speaker based on
Max Volume
distance to the listening position.
Initial Volume
Pure Direct Mode Level Manually adjusts the volume of each speaker.
Adaptive DSP Level Speaker setup items
Parametric EQ Selects an equalizer to adjust speaker output
Video Auto Setup Optimizes the speaker configuration automatically.
characteristics.
Analog to Analog Conversion Test Tone Generates test tones.
Processing Manual Setup Manually adjusts parameters for speakers.
HDMI Setting Pattern

■ Automatic speaker setup
HDMI Control
Registers two patterns for “Power Amp Assign,” “Configuration,”
Control Select Auto Setup
ARC (Audio Return Channel) Optimizes the speaker configuration automatically using YPAO “Level,” “Distance,” and “Parametric EQ” settings and switches
TV Audio Input (☞p. 40). between the two setting patterns.
Audio Output When the automatic speaker setup (YPAO) is performed, the result of
Standby Through
■ Manual speaker setup measurement is registered on the currently selected Setting Pattern.
Network
Manual Setup
IP Address Setting Data Copy
The following parameters can be specified manually.
Network Standby
MAC Address Filter
Copies “Setting Pattern” data in the specified direction.
Multi Zone Pattern1 2 Copies Pattern1 settings to Pattern2.
Zone2 Set
Pattern2 1 Copies Pattern2 settings to Pattern1.
Zone3 Set
Monitor Out Assign
Party Mode Set
Zone Scene Rename
Zone Rename
Function
Auto Power Down
Input Assignment
Display Set
Trigger Output1
Trigger Output2
Memory Guard
Language
En 93
SETUP
5ch BI-AMP + SB Enables the bi-amp connection and external surround

Front
Power Amp Assign Selects the size (sound reproduction capacity) of the front
back speakers (☞p. 24).
In addition to the 7.1-channel speaker connection, various speaker speakers. J1
5ch BI-AMP + SB + Enables the bi-amp connection, external surround
configurations are possible using the presence speakers connection, FPR back and presence speakers (☞p. 25).
Large Select this for large speakers. The front speakers will
bi-amp connection or multi-zone function (☞p. 20, p. 21). produce all of the front channel frequency
components.
Configuration
Small (Default) Select this for small speakers. The subwoofer will
Displays the speakers connected to this unit or changes the sizes of produce front channel low-frequency components.
the speakers. The crossover frequency can be selected from 40Hz,
60Hz, 80Hz (Default), 90Hz, 100Hz, 110Hz, 120Hz,
160Hz, or 200Hz. All frequencies below the selected
frequency will be sent to the subwoofer.
Center
Selects the size of the center speaker.
7ch Normal Enables the normal 7-channel speakers and front
presence speakers (☞p. 16).
Large Select this when a large center speaker is connected.
7ch + 1ZONE Enables the normal 7-channel speakers and zone2 and
Small (Default) Select this when a small center speaker is connected.
zone3 speakers (☞p. 18).
The crossover frequency can be selected from 40Hz,
The Zone assigned to EXTRA SP1 can be selected In the “Configuration,” you can select the speaker size 60Hz, 80Hz (Default), 90Hz, 100Hz, 110Hz, 120Hz,
from Zone2 or Zone3.
characteristic (Large or Small). Select the size (sound 160Hz, or 200Hz when selecting this. All frequencies
7ch + 2ZONE Enables the normal 7-channel, Zone2 and Zone3 reproduction capacity) that matches your speakers. below the selected frequency will be sent to the
speakers (☞p. 19). subwoofer.
The Zone assigned to EXTRA SP1/EXTRA SP2 can
None Select this when there is no center speaker. The front
be selected from Zone2 or Zone3.
speakers will produce center channel audio.
7ch + FRONT Enables the normal 7-channel speakers and external
front speakers (☞p. 23).
Woofer diameter
7ch + FPR Enables the normal 7-channel speakers and external • 16 cm or larger → Large
presence speakers (☞p. 23). • 16 cm or smaller → Small
7ch + FPR + 1ZONE Enables the normal 7-channel speakers, external

presence speakers and zone speakers (☞p. 24).
The Zone assigned to EXTRA SP1 can be selected When speaker size is set to “Small,” low-frequency components
from Zone2 or Zone3. of the speakers that you configured are produced from the
subwoofer (or from the front speakers if there is no subwoofer).
5ch BI-AMP Enables the bi-amp connection (☞p. 18).
5ch BI-AMP + FPR Enables the bi-amp connection and external presence
speakers (☞p. 24).
J 1 : When “Subwoofer1” and “Subwoofer2” are set to “None,” you can only choose
“Large.” If the front speaker setting is “Small” and you change “Subwoofer1”
and “Subwoofer2” to “None,” it will automatically change to “Large.”
En 94
SETUP
Surround SWFR Layout
• When there are no surround speakers are connected, the setting
Selects the size of the surround speakers. Select a layout of two subwoofers connected to this unit.
will automatically change to “None.”
Large Select this when the surround speakers are large. • You can set surround back audio signals, including from the Left + Right Select when two subwoofers are arranged with one to
playback source, to be mixed down and produced from a single the left and one to the right of this unit.
Small (Default) Select this when the surround speakers are small. The
crossover frequency can be selected from 40Hz, speaker (6.1-channel layout) or produced from left and right Front + Rear Select when two subwoofers are arranged with one in
60Hz, 80Hz (Default), 90Hz, 100Hz, 110Hz, 120Hz, surround speakers (5.1-channel layout). front of and one behind this unit.
160Hz, or 200Hz when selecting this. All frequencies
Monaural x2 Select when two subwoofers are arranged in a manner
below the selected frequency will be sent to the
Front Presence (Default) not suited to either or the other setting options.
subwoofer.
Specify connection of front presence speakers.
None Select this when no surround speakers are connected. Extra Bass
The front speakers will produce surround channel Use (Default) Select this when front presence speakers are
Allows the front channel low-frequency components to be
audio signals. connected.
produced exclusively by the subwoofer, or by both the subwoofer
None Select this when front presence speakers are not and the front speakers.
connected.
• When set to “None,” no sound is produced from the surround
Off (Default) Depending on the size of the front speakers, either the
back speaker even if that speaker is connected.
Subwoofer1 / Subwoofer2 front speakers or the subwoofer produce the front
• When set to “None,” the sound programs will change to Virtual
Confirms the subwoofer. channel low-frequency components.
CINEMA DSP mode.
On The subwoofer and the front speakers produce the
Use (Default) Select this when subwoofer is connected. During front channel low-frequency components.
Surround Back playback, the subwoofer will produce audio from the
Selects the size of the surround back speakers. LFE (low-frequency effect) channel and bass audio
from other channels. J1 When “Subwoofer1” and “Subwoofer2” are set to “None” or
Largex1 Select when one large surround back speaker is Select the phase of the subwoofer from the following
“Front” is set to “Small,” “Extra Bass” is disabled.
connected. items if the bass audio is lacking or unclear.
Normal (Default) Does not change the subwoofer
Largex2 Select when two large surround back speakers are phase.
connected. Reverse Reverses the subwoofer phase.
Smallx1 Select when one small surround back speaker is None Select this when subwoofer is not connected. The
connected. front speakers will produce audio from the LFE (low-
Smallx2 (Default) Select when two small surround back speakers are frequency effect) channel and bass frequency audio
connected. from other channels, when both “Subwoofer1” and
“Subwoofer2” are set to “None.”
None Select this when no surround back speakers are
connected.
J 1 : Enabling “Extra Bass” allows both the subwoofer and the front speakers to
produce bass audio.
En 95
SETUP
SOURCE RECEIVER
Front L / Front R / Center / Surround L / Surround R /

Distance Parametric EQ Surround Back L / Surround Back R / Front Presence L /
Front Presence R / Subwoofer1 / Subwoofer2
1 2
AV
3 4
Adjusts the timing at which the speakers produce audio Adjusts sound quality of tone using a parametric
so that sounds from the speakers reach the listening equalizer.
5 6 7 V-AUX
The parametric equalizer can be used to manually adjust
AUDIO
position at the same time.
1 2 3 4
PEQ Select sound quality for individual speakers.
PHONO MULTI USB NET Selecting adjustment units Select an equalizer type. Set “PEQ Select” to “Manual” and use “PEQ Data
DOCK TUNER [A] [B]
Use iCursor B / C to select the unit for distance Copy” to copy information acquired with automatic
(meters or feet), and press iENTER. Manual Manually adjust equalizer sound. setup. This information can be used as a basis for
Setting distances for each speaker Flat Adjust individual speakers to achieve the performing manual adjustments.
same characteristics. Select this option if
Use iCursor B / C to select the speaker you want to
speakers offer the same quality. Use iCursor B / C repeatedly to select
configure, and press iENTER.
h Then use iCursor D / E to set the distance from the Front Adjust individual speakers to achieve the
same characteristics as the front left and
1 “Band / Gain,” “Freq. / Gain,” or “Q / Gain”
and press iENTER.
speaker to your listening position.
ON SCREEN right speakers. Select this option if front
left and right speakers offer significantly Use iCursor D / E repeatedly to adjust the
ENTER
i Adjustable range
Default setting
0.30 m to 24.00 m (1.0 ft. to 80.0 ft.)
3.00 m (10.0 ft.)

Natural
greater quality than other speakers.
Adjust all speakers to achieve a natural

2 parameter and use iCursor B / C
repeatedly to adjust the gain.
Adjustment 0.05 m (0.2 ft.) sound. Select this if high-frequency
increments sounds seem too strong when “PEQ Press iENTER to exit the edit window.
Through (Default)
Select” is set to “Flat.”
Disable the equalizer.

3
TUN./CH Level
Repeat steps 1 to 3 to configure other
Separately adjusts the volume of each speaker.
Use iCursor B / C to select the desired speaker, and
PEQ Data Copy
Select 1 of the 3 parametric equalizer types acquired with
4 parameters.
LEVEL
z To reset all parameter settings for the selected
press iENTER. automatic setup and manually copy that information to the
Then use iCursor D / E to adjust the volume for the manual adjustments. speaker, select “Yes” in “Reset” and press iENTER.
selected speaker.
Flat Manual Copy the “Flat” parametric equalizer
Adjustable range -10.0 dB to +10.0 dB information acquired with automatic Press hON SCREEN to close the menu.
Default setting 0.0 dB
Front Manual
setup.
Copy the “Front” parametric equalizer

5
Adjustment 0.5 dB
information acquired with automatic
increments
setup.
Natural Manual Copy the “Natural” parametric equalizer

You can also adjust the volume of each speaker by information acquired with automatic
using zLEVEL. setup.
Press zLEVEL and use iCursor B / C to select
the desired speaker. Then use iCursor B / C to
adjust the volume for the selected speaker.
En 96
SETUP
Setting the audio output function of this ■ Synchronizing audio/video output

Test Tone
unit Lipsync
Turns the test tone generator on or off.
Adjusts the delay between audio and video output (Lipsync
Off (Default) Does not generate test tones.
function).
On Generates test tones. While “On” is selected, test Selects a compensation method for the delay between audio and
tones are produced constantly.
video output.
Auto (Default) J1 When connecting to a TV via HDMI, automatically

You can use the test tone in a variety of circumstances. For adjusts output timing if the TV supports an automatic
example, you can adjust the volume balance settings for each lipsync function.
speaker, or whenever you adjust the settings on the internal
Manual Manually adjusts the correction time. Select this when
parametric equalizer, you can listen to the actual effect while
the monitor does not support the automatic lipsync
operating this unit. Turn the test tone off when you have finished Sound setup items function.
making adjustments.
Lipsync Adjusts the delay between video and audio output.
Dynamic Range Selects the dynamic range adjustment method for Adjustable range 0 ms to 250 ms
Dolby Digital and DTS playback.
Default setting 0 ms
Max Volume Sets the maximum volume for this receiver.
Adjustment 1 ms
Initial Volume Sets the initial volume for when this receiver is turned increments
on.
Pure Direct Mode Selects whether or not this unit outputs video signal in
Pure Direct Mode.
Adaptive DSP Level Adjusts the level of DSP effect in conjunction with the
volume level.
J 1 : This setting is effective at the HDMI OUT jack selected by using

wHDMI OUT.
En 97
SETUP
■ Auto-adjusting Dolby Digital and DTS ■ Setting the startup volume ■ Adjusting DSP effect and volume level
dynamic range
Initial Volume Adaptive DSP Level
Dynamic Range
Sets the initial volume for when this receiver is turned on. When Automatically adjust the level of DSP effect in conjunction with
Selects the dynamic range adjustment method for audio bitstream this parameter is set to “Off,” the volume is set at the level when the the volume level.
(Dolby Digital and DTS) signal playback. receiver last entered standby mode. J1
Off Disables automatic adjustment of the level of DSP
MAX (Default) Produces audio without adjusting the dynamic range. Adjustable range Off, Mute, -80.0 dB to +16.5 dB effect.
STD Adjusts the dynamic range for optimum volume for Default setting Off On (Default) Adjusts the degree of DSP effect in conjunction with
regular home use. volume level. The higher the volume level, the less the
Adjustment 0.5 dB
DSP effect applied. The lower the volume level, the
MIN/AUTO (MIN) Sets the dynamic range suitable for low increments
greater the DSP effect applied.
volume or a quiet environment, such as at night, for
This feature also corrects sound effect according to
bitstream signals except for Dolby TrueHD signals.
(AUTO) Adjusts the dynamic range for Dolby
■ Video signal output in Pure Direct Mode the result of automatic measurement.
TrueHD signals based on input signal information.

Pure Direct Mode
■ Setting the maximum volume Selects whether or not this unit outputs video signal in Pure Direct
Mode.
Max Volume
Auto (Default) Automatically output video signal when the input
Specify the maximum volume level so that sound is not too loud. source equipping video signal input jacks or content
The default setting of +16.5 dB produces the highest volume. window is selected. If no video signal is input, only
the wall paper is displayed.
Adjustable range -30.0 dB to +16.5 dB (maximum volume)
Video Off Does not output video signal including the wall paper.
Default setting +16.5 dB
Adjustment 5.0 dB
increments
J 1 : When you set “Max Volume” at a lower level than “Initial Volume,” “Max
Volume” has priority.
En 98
SETUP
Setting this unit’s video output function ■ Analog-to-analog video conversion ■ Adjusting video with conversion of video
signal to HDMI
Analog to Analog Conversion
Processing
Enables or disables video conversion between analog video jacks.
Adjust video with conversion of video input to HDMI video.
Off Disables video conversion between analog video
jacks. Off (Default) Video are not adjusted with processing.
On (Default) Enables video conversion between analog video jacks. On Video are adjusted with processing.
Resolution J1
• Analog-to-HDMI video conversion is always possible unless
video signals are being input at the HDMI input jacks or 1080p- Auto (Default) Automatic upscaling in accordance with TV
Video setup items
resolution analog video signals are being input (☞p. 141). resolution.
Analog to Analog Enable or disable video conversion between analog • This unit does not convert 480 line video signals and 576 line 480p (576p) Upscaling to 480p (576p).
Conversion video jacks. video signals interchangeably.
720p Upscaling to 720p.
Processing Enable or disable adjustment of resolution, aspect • 480p-, 576p-, 1080i- and 720p-resolution video signals can not
1080i Upscaling to 1080i.
ratio and video signal correction for video signal be output at the S-video and video jacks of MON.OUT/ZONE
converted to HDMI video. OUT (☞p. 141). 1080p Upscaling to 1080p.
• The converted video signals are only output at the MONITOR Through No upscaling.
OUT jacks.
• When composite video or S-video signals from a VCR are
• When a TV is connected to this unit via the HDMI jack, this unit
converted into component video signals, the picture quality may
automatically detects a resolution that the TV supports. Only the
suffer depending on your VCR.
detected resolution can be selected.
• Unconventional signals input at the composite video or S-video
• If this unit cannot detect the resolution that the TV supports, set
jacks cannot be converted or may be output abnormally. In such
“MONITOR CHECK” in the Advanced Setup menu to “SKIP”
cases, set “Analog to Analog Conversion” to “Off.”
(☞p. 123) and try again.
J 1 : This item can be set, when “Processing” is set to “On.”
En 99
SETUP
Aspect J1 Adjustment Setting HDMI functions
Specifies the method used to convert video signal with a 4:3 aspect Adjusts video quality. The preset feature can also be used to save
ratio (480i/576i/480p/576p) to the 16:9 aspect ratio (720p/1080i/ up to six preferred video quality settings. Select a preset and then
1080p). adjust the following parameters.
Through (Default) Does not adjust the aspect ratio of video signal Contrast When this item is set to “Auto,” image contrast is
sources. Enhancement enhanced. “Off” (Default) disables the contrast
enhancement function.
16:9 Normal Transmits 4:3 aspect ratio video signals to a 16:9 TV
with black bands on either side of the screen. Resolution When this item is set to “Auto,” image resolution is
Enhancement enhanced. “Off” (Default) disables the resolution
Smart Zoom Adjusts video images with an aspect ratio of 4:3 to fit
enhancement function.
video monitors with an aspect ratio of 16:9.
When “Aspect” is set to “Smart Zoom,” the edges of Noise Reduction When this item is set to “Auto,” image noise is
video images may be distorted with display on the reduced. “Off” (Default) disables the noise reduction HDMI setup items
video monitor. function.
HDMI Control Turns the HDMI Control on or off.
Brightness Adjusts image brightness.
Control Select Choose an HDMI OUT jack on which HDMI
Control range: -100 to +100
Control function is enabled.
Initial setting: 0
ARC (Audio Return Turns the Audio Return Channel function on or
Contrast Adjusts image contrast.
Channel) off.
Initial setting: 0 TV Audio Input Chooses automatically selected audio input in
conjunction with TV operation when the
Saturation Adjusts image saturation.
HDMI Control is turned on.
Initial setting: 0 Audio Output Specifies whether or not audio signal is output
through this unit and a TV connected via the
HDMI OUT 1-2 jacks.
Standby Through J2 Turns the Standby Through function on or off.
J 1 : This item can be set, when “Processing” is set to “On.”

J 2 : This item appears depending on “HDMI Control.”
En 100
SETUP
■ Receiver operation via TV (HDMI Control) ■ Listening to TV audio via single HDMI ■ Selecting an input source to assign audio
cable (Audio Return Channel) input for the TV
HDMI Control
ARC (Audio Return Channel) TV Audio Input
Set the HDMI Control function to “On” to operate devices
connected via HDMI. If the TV or other external components You can enable or disable the Audio Return Channel function. Select the input source that receives audio signals from TV while
support HDMI Control (e.g., Panasonic VIERA Link), you can use When using a TV that supports Audio Return Channel function and the HDMI Control function is on.
the remote controls of those devices to operate some of this unit’s the function is enabled, the TV’s audio output is transmit to this When the TV is set to output sounds via this unit, the TV audio
functions, and to synchronize this unit with the operation of those unit via an HDMI cable. input is automatically selected to the input source assigned
devices. The TV audio input to this unit is regarded as the input source here. J2
Refer to “Using the HDMI Control function” (☞p. 125) for setting selected in “TV Audio Input.” J2
TV1
instructions. By means of this function, you do not need to connect the TV’s
audio output (digital audio output or analog audio output) to the Audio input AUDIO1-4
Off (Default) Sets HDMI Control to “Off.” unit.
Default setting AUDIO1
On Sets HDMI Control to “On.” J1
Off (Default) Sets the Audio Return Channel to “Off.”
TV2
If this unit is connected to HDMI devices that do not support the On Sets the Audio Return Channel to “On.”
HDMI Control function, these functions will not operate. Audio input AUDIO1-4
When the TV audio is input to the unit using Audio Return
Default setting AUDIO3
■ Selecting an HDMI OUT jack for the HDMI Channel, “TV” is displayed on the front panel display.
Control function
TV AUDIO1 • “TV Audio Input” is enabled only for the HDMI OUT 1 or 2 jack
VOLUME
selected with “Control Select.”
Control Select TheBottomLin • Refer to “Switching the input source on this unit automatically
Select the HDMI OUT jack that utilizes the HDMI Control when listening to TV audio” (☞p. 126) for instructions.
function. • “ARC (Audio Return Channel)” is enabled only for the HDMI
Refer to “Using the HDMI Control function” (☞p. 125) for setting OUT 1 or 2 jack selected with “Control Select.”
instructions. • Refer to “Single HDMI cable input to TV audio with Audio
Return Channel function” (☞p. 127) for setting instructions.
OUT1(TV1) Applies the HDMI Control function for the HDMI
OUT 1 jack.
OUT2(TV2) Applies the HDMI Control function for the HDMI

OUT 2 jack.
We recommend to unplug and plug again the power cable of this

unit and the TV when changing the Control Select.
J 1 : When the HDMI Control is “On,” the Standby Through function is J 2 : While the Audio Return Channel function is on, the jack selected for the input
automatically enabled. When this unit enters standby mode, the audio and source cannot be used.
video signals from the last-selected HDMI input source will continue to be
transmitted to the TV. The HDMI input source can only be changed using the
remote control.
En 101
SETUP
■ Specify whether or not audio signal is OUT2 ■ Transmitting HDMI audio/video to the TV
output through this unit and a TV Specify whether or not audio signal is output through a TV during standby mode (Standby Through)
connected via the HDMI OUT jack connected via the HDMI OUT 2 jack.
Standby Through
Off (Default) Audio is not output through a TV connected via the
Audio Output
HDMI OUT 2 jack. This function allows audio/video signals from HDMI inputs to
Choose whether audio from an external component, such as a BD/ On Outputs audio through a TV connected via the HDMI
continue to be transmitted to a TV when this unit is in standby
DVD player, connected via HDMI is played back through this unit OUT 2 jack. When this setting is selected, audio from mode.
or through a TV. the external component is output in a format When the Standby Through function is “On,” audio/video signals
compatible with the TV. continue to be output to the TV from the last HDMI input source
Amp
before this unit enters standby mode. The HDMI input source can be
Specify whether or not audio signal is output through this unit.
selected using dAV1-7 or dV-AUX in standby mode.
When “HDMI Control” is set to “On,” the settings of “Amp”
Off Audio is not output through this unit.
and the HDMI OUT jack (OUT1 or OUT2) selected with Off (Default) Sets Standby Through to “Off.”
On (Default) Audio is output through this unit. When this setting is “Control Select” are interlocked with “HDMI Control.”
On Transmits audio/video signals from the selected
selected, audio from the external component is output
HDMI input source to the TV.
in a format compatible with this unit.
OUT1 • When “HDMI Control” is “On,” Standby Through function is

Specify whether or not audio signal is output through a TV automatically enabled and “Standby Through” is not displayed.
connected via the HDMI OUT 1 jack. • When the Standby Through function is on, the HDMI Through/
iPod Charge indicator on the front panel lights during the standby
Off (Default) Audio is not output through a TV connected via the
mode. This unit consumes 2 to 5 W of power.
HDMI OUT 1 jack.
• Input source can be selected during Standby Through.
On Outputs audio through a TV connected via the HDMI
OUT 1 jack. When this setting is selected, audio from
the external component is output in a format
compatible with the TV.
En 102
SETUP
Adjusting this unit’s network parameters ■ Specifying network parameters (IP ■ Turning this unit on by the command over
address, etc.) the network when in the standby mode
IP Address Network Standby

Selects whether or not this unit automatically acquires network Selects whether or not to turn this unit on by the command over the
parameters (IP address, subnet mask, default gateway, primary network when in the standby mode.
DNS server and secondary DNS server) from a network device
such as a router equipped with DHCP function. Off (Default) Disables to turn this unit on by the command over the
network.
DHCP On Enables to turn this unit on by the command over the
network.
Off Select this setting to specify IP address manually.
Network setup items
On (Default) Select this setting to acquire IP address from the
IP Address Selects whether this unit acquires network parameters network’s DHCP server automatically. When “Network Standby” is set to “On,” this unit can be turned
(IP address, etc.) from the network’s DHCP server on by the command over the network during the standby mode
automatically, or whether these parameters are Manual Setup with the power consumption of about only 5W.
specified manually.
IP Address Specifies the IP address assigned to this unit. An IP
Network Standby Selects whether or not commands are accepted over
address used by another device on the same network ■ Setting the MAC Address Filter
the network when this unit is in standby mode.
may not be used.
MAC Address Filter Sets the MAC address filter to restrict network access MAC Address Filter
Subnet Mask Specifies the subnet mask assigned to this unit.
to this unit.
Default Gateway Specifies the IP address of the default gateway. Sets the MAC address filter to restrict access to this unit in LAN.
DNS Server Specifies the IP addresses of the primary and Mode

(Primary)/DNS secondary Domain Name System (DNS) servers.
Server (Secondary) Off (Default) Disables the MAC address filter function.
On Permits access to this unit only by network devices

with specified MAC addresses.
If the network has only one DNS address, enter that address in
“DNS Server (Primary).” If the network has two or more DNS
Address Setup
addresses, enter one of the addresses in “DNS Server (Primary)”
Specifies the MAC addresses of network devices permitted to
and the other in “DNS Server (Secondary).”
access to this unit when “MAC Address Filter” is set to “On.”
En 103
SETUP
Setting this unit’s multi-zone function ■ Displaying the video on the TV monitor in
Fixed Disables volume level adjustment of Zone2 or Zone3
Zone2 and Zone3
speakers.
Variable (Default) Enables volume level adjustment of Zone2 or Zone3 Monitor Out Assign
speakers.
Sets component video, S-video or video (MONITOR OUT/ZONE
OUT) jacks for main zone, Zone2 or Zone3 use. When a TV
When setting the Power Amp Assign function, “Volume” is monitor in the main zone is connected via one of the HDMI OUT
automatically set to “Variable.” Refer “Speaker layout” jacks, MON.OUT jacks can be used to connect another monitor in
(☞p. 16) for details on the Power Amp Assign function. Zone2 or Zone3.
Main (Default) Outputs the video signals for the main zone.
Max Volume
Multi Zone setup items Specify the maximum volume level in Zone2 so that sound is not Zone2 J1 Outputs the video signals for Zone2.
too loud. Zone3 J1 Outputs the video signals for Zone3.
Zone2 Set Sets the Zone2 functions.
Zone3 Set Sets the Zone3 functions. Adjustable range -30.0 dB to +16.5 dB (maximum volume)
■ Setting the party mode
Monitor Out Assign Displays the menus of Zone2 or Zone3 on the TV Default setting +16.5 dB
monitor.
Adjustment 5.0 dB Party Mode Set
Party Mode Set Enable or disable the party mode function. increments
In party mode, the main zone sources can be played in Zone2 and
Zone Scene Rename Changes the scene names of Zone2 or Zone3. Zone3 simultaneously (☞p. 131). The party mode function can be
Initial Volume
Zone Rename Changes the name of Zone2 or Zone3. enabled or disabled individually for Zone2 and Zone3.
Specify the initial volume level in Zone2 when this unit is turned on.
Target : Zone2
■ Adjusting Zone2 or Zone3 volume Adjustable range Off, Mute, -80.0 dB to +16.5 dB
Default setting Off Disable Disables the party mode function in Zone2.
Zone2 Set
Adjustment 0.5 dB Enable (Default) Enables the party mode function in Zone2.
increments
Zone3 Set Target : Zone3
Volume Mono
Disable Disables the party mode function in Zone3.
Selects whether or not volume level adjustment of Zone2 or Zone3 Switches between stereo and monaural modes for Zone2 audio
speakers is enabled. signal. Enable (Default) Enables the party mode function in Zone3.
Off (Default) Does not convert Zone2 audio signal to monaural

sound.
On Converts Zone2 audio signal to monaural sound.
J 1 : The ON SCREEN menu, Option menu and content window can be displayed
on the monitor for Zone2 and Zone3. For details on features of Zone2 OSD,
refer to “Features of the Zone2/Zone3 OSD” (☞p. 130).
En 104
SETUP
SOURCE RECEIVER
■ Changing Zone2 and Zone3 scene

Press iCursor C to select “OK” and press Confirm the zone name by pressing
1 2
AV
3 4
names
8 iENTER to register the new scene name. 6 iENTER.
Zone Scene Rename
• To cancel the operation without applying changes, Press iCursor C to select “OK” and press
7
5 6 7 V-AUX
select “CANCEL” and press iENTER.

AUDIO
1 2 3 4 Editing the name of the selected scene in Zone2 or iENTER to register the new zone name.
PHONO MULTI USB NET Zone3. • To clear the characters entered in step 5, select
DOCK TUNER [A] [B] “CLEAR” and press iENTER. • To cancel the operation without applying changes,
Use iCursor B / C repeatedly to select • Scene names may consist of up to 20 characters. select “CANCEL” and press iENTER.
1 “Zone Scene Rename” and press • To clear the characters entered in step 4, select
iENTER. ■ Changing Zone names “CLEAR” and press iENTER.
• Zone names may consist of up to 9 characters.
Press iCursor B / C to select a zone and
2 press iENTER.
Zone Rename
Editing the name of the selected zone. Making the receiver easier to use
Press iCursor B / C to select a scene you
ENTER
i 3 want to rename and press iENTER.
1 Use iCursor B / C repeatedly to select
“Zone Rename” and press iENTER.
Press iCursor B / C to select a zone you

2 want to rename and press iENTER.
Function setup items
Press iENTER. Auto Power Down

4
This unit enters standby mode if no
operations are performed.
Editing the name is available.
Input Assignment Assigns the input jack to the selected
input source.
selected character.
3 Press iENTER.
Editing the name is available.
Display Set Specifies menu items displayed on TV
screen and the front panel.
Trigger Output1 Specifies TRIGGER OUT 1 jack

6 Repeat step 5 to enter the desired scene
name. 4 and press iCursor D / E to enter the
selected character.
Trigger Output2
function.
Specifies TRIGGER OUT 2 jack

function.
Confirm the zone name by pressing
7 iENTER.
5 Repeat step 4 to enter the desired zone
name.
Memory Guard Protects some settings against accidental
modification.
En 105
SETUP
SOURCE RECEIVER
■ Entering standby mode ■ Assigning component input and

Press iCursor D / E to select “c” and then
1 2
AV
3 4
automatically when no operations
are performed
output jacks
3 press iENTER.
Input Assignment Select “None” to clear the existing assignment.
5 6 7 V-AUX
AUDIO Auto Power Down

1 2 3 4 Assigns the coaxial or optical input jack(s) to the
PHONO MULTI USB NET If you do not operate this unit or use the remote control selected input source when this unit’s initial settings do
DOCK TUNER [A] [B] for an extended period of time, it will automatically go not correspond to your needs. Change the parameter to
into standby mode (Auto Power Down function). This reassign the respective jacks and effectively connect
function’s default setting is “Off.” When you want to more components.
enable this function, set the amount of time to pass Once the input jacks are reassigned, the corresponding
before this unit will enter standby. component can be selected using the Input selector
buttons.
4Hours Goes into standby mode, when you have
not operated this unit for four hours. Example: Assigning the OPTICAL input jack to
The choices indicate the following jacks.
“AV1.”
8Hours Goes into standby mode, when you have a, b, f : COAXIAL jacks
ENTER
i not operated this unit for eight hours. c, d, e : OPTICAL jacks
12Hours Goes into standby mode, when you have Press iENTER to display the “Input , , , : COMPONENT VIDEO jacks
1
RETURN
not operated this unit for twelve hours. Assignment” screen. The choices indicate the jacks marked the same
Off (Default) Auto Power Down function is disabled. alphanumeric on the rear of this unit. For details on
marks on the rear of this unit, refer to “Rear panel”
(☞p. 10).
This unit starts a countdown of 30 seconds before
entering the standby mode. Pressing any key of the
remote control during the countdown cancels entering Press iRETURN to apply change and
the standby mode and reset the timer. 4 return to the previous screen.
• A specific item cannot be selected more than once for

the same type of jack.
Press iCursor B / C / D / E to select the
2 cell at the intersection with the “AV1” and
“Coax/Opt” and then press iENTER.
• Only component, coaxial and optical jacks can be
reassigned.
• Coaxial and optical jacks cannot be assigned to the
input at the same time.
En 106
SETUP
■ Specifying menu display ■ Setting TRIGGER OUT functions Target Zone

Specify the zone with which TRIGGER OUT 1 or 2 jack function
Display Set Trigger Output1 is synchronized.
Specify front panel display brightness and TV screen wall paper. Main When “Trigger Mode” is set to “Power,” electronic
Trigger Output2 signal transmission is synchronized with the power
Front Panel Display status of the main zone.
Specify front panel display brightness and message scroll pattern. Synchronizes TRIGGER OUT 1 or 2 jack function with the power
When “Trigger Mode” is set to “Source,” electronic
status of each zone or input switching.
signal transmission is synchronized with input
Dimmer Adjustable range: -4 - 0 switching in the main zone.
Reduce brightness of the front panel display. As the Trigger Mode
value is lowered, the panel display darkens. Specify the condition that activates TRIGGER OUT 1 or 2 jack Zone2 When “Trigger Mode” is set to “Power,” electronic
function. signal transmission is synchronized with the power
Scroll Selects the manner in which display scrolls when the status of Zone2.
total number of characters exceeds the display area on
Power (Default) TRIGGER OUT 1 or 2 jack function is synchronized When “Trigger Mode” is set to “Source,” electronic
the front panel display. signal transmission is synchronized with input
with the power status of the zone specified with
Select “Continue” for continuous scrolling of all switching in Zone2.
“Target Zone.”
characters.
Select “Once” to scroll through all characters once Source TRIGGER OUT 1 or 2 jack function is synchronized Zone3 When “Trigger Mode” is set to “Power,” electronic
and then halt scrolling for display of only the first 14 with input switching in the zone specified with signal transmission is synchronized with the power
characters. “Target Zone.” status of Zone3.
Electronic signal is transmitted according to the When “Trigger Mode” is set to “Source,” electronic
“Target Source” setting. signal transmission is synchronized with input
Wall Paper
switching in Zone3.
Specify the wall paper displayed on the TV screen when no video Manual Select this to manually switch the output level for
signal is input. Select one that you prefer. electronic signal transmission with “Manual.” All (Default) When “Trigger Mode” is set to “Power,” electronic
signal transmission is synchronized with the power
Picture 1-3 Displays an image on the TV screen when there is no status of the main zone or Zone2 or Zone3.
video signal. When “Trigger Mode” is set to “Source,” electronic
signal transmission is synchronized with input
Gray Displays a gray background on the TV screen when switching in the main zone or Zone2 or Zone3.
there is no video signal.
En 107
SETUP
Target Source ■ Prohibiting setting changes Language
Specify the output level of electronic signal transmitted each time
input is switched. Memory Guard
Low J1 Terminates electronic signal transmission when the Prohibits setting changes to prevent careless changes being made
input source specified with this option is selected. to the settings on Setup menu.
High (Default) J2 Electronic signal is transmitted when the input source
Off (Default) Settings are not protected.
specified with this option is selected.
On Prohibits changes to the settings on Setup menu until
it is returned to “Off.”
This setting is available only when “Trigger Mode” is set to While set to “On,” the unit displays “Memory
“Source.” Guard!” when an attempt is made to change the
settings. Select the language used for display of menus and messages. J3
Choices: English (English), (Japanese), (French),
Manual (German), (Spanish),
Manually switch the output level for electronic signal transmission.
(Russian)
This setting can also be used to confirm proper function of the
external component connected via the TRIGGER OUT 1 or 2 jack. For details on selecting a language, refer to “Language
selection” (☞p. 2).
Low J1 Stops the electronic signal transmission.
High (Default) J2 Transmits the electronic signal.
This setting is available only when “Trigger Mode” is set to

“Manual.”
J 1 : This unit outputs 0 V when selecting “Low.”

J 2 : This unit outputs 12 V when selecting “High.”
J 3 : Content window information is displayed in the language in which that
information was released.
En 108
SETUP
SOURCE RECEIVER
Confirming information of this unit (Information menu)

A variety of information for this unit can be displayed.
AV
■ Audio Signal information ■ Video Signal information

1 2 3 4
5 6 7 V-AUX
Selecting information
1 2
AUDIO
3 4
Displays information on the current audio signal. Displays information on the current video signal.
PHONO MULTI USB NET
Press hON SCREEN. Format Signal format. When this unit is unable to HDMI Signal Source video signal type and video signal
DOCK TUNER [A] [B]
1 detect a digital signal, it automatically

switches to analog input.
output to this unit’s HDMI OUT 1-2
jacks.
Sampling The number of samples taken per second HDMI Resolution Input signal (analog or HDMI) and output
from a continuous signal to make a signal (HDMI) resolution.
discrete signal.
Analog Resolution Resolution of the source video signal and
h Channel The number of source channels in the the analog video signal output to this
input signal (front/surround/LFE). For unit’s MONITOR OUT jacks.
ON SCREEN
example, a multi-channel soundtrack with
3 front channels, 2 surround channels and HDMI Error Error message for HDMI sources or
ENTER
i LFE is displayed as “3/2/0.1”. connected HDMI devices (☞p. 132).
This information is displayed only when
Bitrate The number of bits passing a given point
the error come up.
Use iCursor B / C to select “Information” per second.
2 and press iENTER. Dialogue The dialogue normalization level preset
to the current input bitstream signal.
■ HDMI Monitor information
Displays information on the TV screen connected to this
unit’s HDMI OUT 1-2 jacks.
• “---” is displayed when this unit cannot display the
corresponding information. Interface Displays information on the current
• Some high-definition audio bitstream contents may not connection interface.
include the discrete surround back left and right Video Resolution Displays the frequency for each video
channel signals, but are encoded at a sampling rate of resolution of the TV currently connected.
192 kHz.
• Even when direct bitstream output settings are applied,
Use iCursor D / E to select an Information
3
some players convert the Dolby TrueHD or Dolby
menu and press iENTER. Digital Plus bitstreams to the Dolby Digital bitstreams,
while converting DTS-HD Master Audio or DTS-HD
High Resolution Audio bitstreams to DTS bitstreams.
En 109
SETUP
Confirming information of this unit (Information menu)
■ Network information
Displays information on the network status. Refer to “Adjusting
this unit’s network parameters” (☞p. 103) for details on setting the
network status.
IP Address / Displays the status of the current IP address assigned

Subnet Mask / to this unit.
Default Gateway
DNS Server (P) / Displays the IP address of the primary and secondary
DNS Server (S) DNS (Domain Name System) servers.
MAC Address Displays the MAC address filter set to this unit.
Status Displays the network status of this unit.
■ System information
Displays information on the current settings of the advanced setup.
Remote ID Displays the Remote ID set to this unit.
TV Format Displays the TV format set to this unit.
Speaker Impedance Displays the speaker impedance set to this unit.
System ID Displays the system ID of this unit.
Firmware Version Displays the current version of the firmware installed

to this unit.
When detecting the latest firmware over a network:

– exclamation point appears on the Information menu icon
– message indicating that the latest firmware is released appears
in the System information
In this case, update the latest firmware by using “NETWORK”
of “FIRM UPDATE” in Advanced Setup menu.
■ Zone information
Displays information on the currently selected input and the
volume of Zone2 or Zone3.
En 110
SETUP
SOURCE RECEIVER
m Controlling the remote control to operate various functions

b
You can operate an external component such as TV and DVD player with the remote control of this unit by setting the code for external component (remote control code).
AV The remote control code can be set for each input source. Individual setting allows you to switch external components seamlessly depending on the selected input source.
1 2 3 4
5 6
AUDIO
7 V-AUX
Selecting input source connected to DVD
d player
Keys connecting external
1 2 3 4
PHONO MULTI USB NET

components
DOCK TUNER [A] [B]
The remote control keys for controlling external

DVD player
components are available only when the external
components have corresponding control keys.
Playback/Stop
TOP MENU POP-UP/MENU
g bSOURCE A
CD player Switches an external component on and off.
gExternal component operation keys
ENTER
i
Selecting input source connected to CD Functions as a recording or playback key of an external
RETURN DISPLAY
q player component, or a menu display key.
REC
iCursor, iENTER, iRETURN
g Operates the menus of external components.
DVD player kTV control keys J1
kINPUT Switches video inputs of TV.

INPUT
TV VOL TV CH
kMUTE Mutes TV volume temporarily.
MUTE k Playback/Stop
kTV VOL +/- Controls the volume of TV.
CD player
kTV CH +/- Switches TV channels.
kA Turns on and off TV.

mSOURCE/RECEIVER glows orange when
operation of this unit is enabled.
mSOURCE/RECEIVER glows green when qDISPLAY
Switches an external component display.
operation of an external component is enabled.
u uNumeric keys
1 2 3
TUN./CH
Functions as numeric keys of an external component.
4 5 6
7 8 9
10 0
J 1 : When remote control codes for external components are kTV control keys can be used to control the TV selected external components, and the kTV control keys can be used
registered with dInput selector or kA (kTV control with dInput selector. to control the TV registered with kA.
keys), the following operations are possible. • When a remote control code for a device other than a TV is • When a TV remote control code is registered with kA, only
• When a TV remote control code is registered with the dInput registered with dInput selector, keys including the kTV control keys can be used to control the TV.
selector, gTOP MENU, gPOP-UP/MENU, iCursor, iCursor, gTOP MENU, gPOP-UP/MENU,
qDISPLAY and uNumeric keys and qDISPLAY and uNumeric keys can be used to control
En 111
SETUP
Controlling the remote control to operate various functions
SOURCE RECEIVER
m
Customizing the remote control Setup mode Descriptions Page
Control
Remote
Category Manufacturer control
ERASE Erase mode. Use this feature to 119 area
AV
code
1 2 3 4
Use the setup mode of the remote control to customize erase the learned functions of each
the remote control. button. AV5 — — —
5 6 7 V-AUX
AUDIO
1 2 3 4 EX-IR Extended IR code mode. This — AV6 — — —

Open the cover of the remote control and
PHONO
DOCK
MULTI
TUNER
USB
[A]
NET
[B] 1 press
feature is for the authorized custom
installers only.
AV7
V-AUX
—
—
—
—
—
—
ASETUP.
AUDIO1 — — —
“SETUP” appears in the display window on the remote
After the configurations, press ASETUP
control.
3 again to exit from the setup menu.
AUDIO2
AUDIO3
CD player
—
Yamaha
—
5095
—
Press iCursor B / C repeatedly to select NOTE
2 the desired setup mode. If no operation is performed for 30 seconds, this unit
automatically exits from the setup menu.
AUDIO4
PHONO
—
—
—
—
—
—
Pressing mSOURCE/RECEIVER repeatedly can
ENTER
i also change the setup mode. MULTI — — —
Setting remote control codes USB — — —

Setup mode Descriptions Page NET — — —
SETUP Top setup mode menu. —
■ Default remote control code DOCK — — —
LEARN Learning mode. Use this feature to 114 settings TUNER — — —
program codes from other remote
TUN./CH The following remote control codes are assigned to input [A]/[B] J1 — — —
controls.
sources at factory default settings. For a complete list of
PRESET Preset mode. Use this feature to 113 available remote control codes, refer to “Remote Control
change the remote control code of Code Search” in the CD-ROM. NOTES
each control area. • You may not be able to operate your Yamaha
SETUP
A
RENAME Renaming mode. Use this feature 116 Remote component even if a Yamaha remote control code is
Control
to change the name of each control Category Manufacturer control preset as listed above.
area
area. code
In this case, try setting another Yamaha remote control
MACRO Macro programming mode. Use 117 AV1 Blu-ray player/ Yamaha 2064 code.
this feature to set the macro recorder • If this unit’s remote control is unable to control other
program. AV2 — — — components with specification of the corresponding
CLEAR Clearing mode. Use this feature to 118 remote control code, it can be programmed using other
AV3 — — —
clear the configurations of this remote controls (☞p. 114).
AV4 — — —
unit.
J 1 : Use [A]/[B] for external component operations only. Set these

keys to remote control codes if you want to perform external
component operations without linking to input source selection of
this unit. For example, it may be convenient to assign remote
control codes for devices such as TVs.
En 112
SETUP
SOURCE RECEIVER
■ Registering remote control codes

Use “Remote Control Code Search” in the CD- Press dAV2 to switch the input source to
1 2
AV
3 4 d
for external component operations
The following section describes how to register remote
1 ROM to search the available remote control
codes from the category or manufacturer of
4 AV2. J1
control code using an example of the registration of the Perform the following steps to register the selected
5 6 7 V-AUX
external components. input source here to the remote control code.
AUDIO remote control codes of a Yamaha BD player connected
1 2 3 4
to AV2 jack. “2064” can be used for a Yamaha BD player.

PHONO MULTI USB NET
DOCK TUNER [A] [B]

• Perform each of the following steps within 30 seconds.
Press ASETUP. AV2
Settings will be automatically stopped if more than 30
seconds passes since the last operation. To reset, repeat
2 “SETUP” appears in the display window on the remote
Press iENTER.
from step 2.
• Remote control code of an external component cannot
control.
5 The current code setting appears.
be set from the name or model number of a unit. Use

“Remote Control Code Search” in the CD-ROM to
SETUP
search the available remote control codes from the 5098
ENTER
i category or manufacturer of external components.
3 “PRESET” and press iENTER. J2 Enter a remote control code “2064” using
• If multiple remote control codes exist, first set the first
code in the list, if it does not work then try the other The remote control enters the preset mode. “PRESET” 6 uNumeric keys.
codes. and name of the currently selected control area appears A remote control code can be entered using
in the display window alternately. iCursor B / C / D / E.
TV
PRESET 2 0 6 4
INPUT
TV VOL TV CH
MUTE k Continues to the

next page
1 2 3
TUN./CH
4 5 6
u
7 8 9
0 ENT
SETUP
A J1 : To control a TV independently from the input source using the J 2 : uENT can also be used for remote control settings as well as
kTV control keys, press kA in step 4 and enter the remote iENTER.
control code for the TV. The kTV control keys can be used to
control the TV regardless of the selected input source.
En 113
SETUP
SOURCE RECEIVER
■ Switching between BD player Programming from other remote

Press iENTER to set the number.
AV
d
7 “OK” appears in the display window if setting was
linked to scene selections controls
1 2 3 4
successful. Press eSCENE and at the same time press
5 6 7 V-AUX
dAV2 and hold it for approximately 3 seconds. The remote control of this unit can receive remote
AUDIO
“NG” appears in the display window if the setting was
1 2 3 4 “OK” appears in the display window if setting was control signals from other remote controls and learn the
unsuccessful. In this case, start over from step 3.
PHONO MULTI USB NET
successful. remote control operation. If a key on the remote control
DOCK TUNER [A] [B]
does not work after being assigned with an external
SCENE
e component’s function or if the remote control code for

1 2 3 4
OK OK that function is not provided, use this learning feature to
make the function operable with the remote control.
If you continuously want to set up another code for Then you can operate the external components by switching
another control area, repeat steps 4 to 7. the input source to AV2, or selecting AV2 in the registered • Perform each of the following steps within 30 seconds.
scene. Settings will be automatically stopped if more than 30
seconds passes since the last operation. To reset, repeat
Same steps for operating other external components, press
Press ASETUP again to exit from the setup from step 1.
ENTER
i 8 menu.
eSCENE and at the same time press the input source key
selected in step 3 and hold it for approximately 3 seconds. • If the remote control of the external component uses
infrared rays, this remote control can learn most of its
If operation is not possible and the manufacturer of functions. The remote control may not recognize
your component has more than one code, try each of special or consecutive signals.
them until you find the correct one. • The keys may not operate the assigned functions
depending on operating conditions of this unit.
TUN./CH
NOTES
• “ERROR” appears in the display window on the Press ASETUP.
SETUP
A
remote control if you press a button not indicated in
the respective step, or when you press more than one
1 “SETUP” appears in the display window.
button simultaneously.
• The supplied remote control does not contain all
possible codes for commercially available audio and 2 “LEARN” and press iENTER.
video components (including Yamaha components). If
operation is not possible with any of the remote Continues to the
control codes, program the new remote control next page
function using the learning feature (☞p. 114) or use
the remote control supplied with the component.
• Functions programmed using the learning mode take
priority over remote control code functions.
En 114
SETUP
SOURCE RECEIVER
l
Select the operation mode (SOURCE, Place this remote control about 5 to 10 cm Press and hold the key you want to program
1 2
AV
3 4
3 RECEIVER or TV mode) for which functions
will be assigned to remote control keys.
4 apart from the remote control of the
external component on a flat surface so that
6 on the other remote control until “OK”
appears in the display window.
5 6
AUDIO
7 V-AUX
• Selecting the SOURCE mode their infrared transmitters are aimed at each “NG” appears in the display window if learning was
1 2 3 4 d Press dInput selector to enter SOURCE mode. other and then press iENTER. unsuccessful. In this case, start over from step 3.
PHONO MULTI USB NET
In this mode, remote control functions for the selected “PRES KEY” appears in the display window.
DOCK TUNER [A] [B]
input source can be assigned to this unit’s remote control. Other remote control
• RECEIVER mode Other remote control
DOCK
Press lRECEIVER A to enter RECEIVER mode.
PHONO
1
1
PROGRAM
TOP MENU
DOCK
PHONO
MULTI
1
TUNER
1
2
PROGRAM
SOURCE RECEIVER
In this mode, remote control functions for external
SCENE
AUDIO
MUTE
AV
MULTI
TUNER
2
SOURCE RECEIVER
USB
[A]
3
3
SCENE
AUDIO
amplifier can be assigned to this unit’s remote control.
VOLUME
POP UP/MENU
MUTE
AV
USB
[A]
3
NET
V-AUX
[B]
4
VOLUME
4
NOTE
NET
V-AUX
[B]
4
4
When remote control functions are assigned for this
mode, it may be impossible to operate this unit using
ENTER
i the remote control. 5 to 10 cm
OK
Press a key to which you want to assign the
• TV mode
Press kA to enter TV mode. 5 function.
When you want to program another function, repeat
steps 3 to 6.
In this mode, remote control functions for a TV can be “START” appears in the display window.
assigned to this unit’s remote control.
Remote control functions can be assigned to this unit’s
DOCK
PHONO
Continues to the
1
1
TV
PROGRAM
TOP MENU
INPUT
next page
MULTI
remote control keys as follows.
TUNER
2
SOURCE RECEIVER
TV VOL TV CH
SCENE
AUDIO
k
MUTE
AV
MUTE
USB
[A]
3
3
VOLUME
POP-UP/MENU
Mode Keys
NET
V-AUX
[B]
4
4
SOURCE Keys for operating external components such
as bSOURCE A,
gExternal component operation keys
and iCursor B / C / D / E.
RECEIVER Keys for operating this unit such as

gExternal component operation keys,
iCursor B / C / D / E and
uNumeric keys.
TV J1 kTV control keys
J 1 : Once kTV control keys are set in TV mode, the TV can

always be controlled.
When kTV control keys are set in SOURCE mode, the TV
specified in SOURCE mode can be controlled when the input
source is selected.
En 115
SETUP
SOURCE RECEIVER
l
Press ASETUP again to exit from the setup
Changing source names in the Press iENTER to set the new name.
1 2
AV
3 4
7 menu. display window 5 “OK” appears in the display window on the remote
control if renaming was successful.
5 6 7 V-AUX NOTES The name of the control area (input source) that appears
AUDIO
1 2 3 4 d • “ERROR” appears in the display window on the in the display window on the remote control can be When you want to rename the another control area,
remote control if you press a button not indicated in changed.
PHONO MULTI USB NET
press dInput selector to select the desired control
DOCK TUNER [A] [B] the respective step, or when you press more than one
area and then press iENTER and then carry out the
button simultaneously. Press ASETUP.
1
SCENE
1 2 3 4 e operations of steps 4 to 5.
• This remote control can learn approximately 200
“SETUP” appears in the display window. • Press lRECEIVER A to rename the control area for
functions. However, depending on the signals learned,
the receiver.
“FULL” may appear in the display before you
Press iCursor B / C repeatedly to select • Press kA to rename the control area for the TV
program 200 functions. In this case, clear unnecessary
programmed functions to make room for further 2 “RENAME” and press iENTER. monitor.
• Press eSCENE key to rename the control area for the
learning (☞p. 119).
Press dInput selector or eSCENE to select scenes. When rename the control area for the scenes of
ENTER
i
• Learning may not be possible in the following cases:
– when the batteries in the remote control for this unit 3 the desired control area. each zone, press BZONE to select a zone before step
1.
or other components are weak.
Edit the name of the control area.
– when the remote control is exposed to direct
sunlight.
4 To locate the position to edit, press iCursor D / E.
– when the function to be programmed is continuous
or uncommon.
To select a character, press iCursor B / C.
6 menu.
Press iCursor B to change the character in the NOTE

following order, or press iCursor C to go in the “ERROR” appears in the display window on the
reverse order: A to Z, a to z, 0 to 9, space, symbols (-, remote control if you press a button not indicated in
k +, /, :). the respective step, or when you press more than one
button simultaneously.
TUN./CH
ZONE SETUP
A
B
En 116
SETUP
SOURCE RECEIVER
l
Macro programming features ■ Recalling programmed macro ■ Programing macro operations
operations You can program your own macro to transmit several
1 2
AV
3 4
The macro programming feature makes it possible to remote control commands in sequence at the press of a
Press ASETUP.
5
1
6
2
AUDIO
7
3
V-AUX
4
perform a series of operations with the press of a single
d button. For example, when you want to play a CD,
button. Be sure to set up remote control codes or perform
learning operations before programming the macro.
normally you would turn on the components, select the
PHONO MULTI USB NET
NOTE
CD input, and press the play button to start playback. Press iCursor B / C repeatedly to select
DOCK TUNER [A] [B]
The macro programming feature lets you perform all of

these operations simply by pressing the macro button.
2 “MACRO” and press iENTER.
We do not recommend that you program continuous
operations (for example, volume control) in a macro.
The buttons listed as macro buttons below are factory set

with macro programs. You can also program your own MACRO Press ASETUP.
macros.
To automatically transmit these signals 3 “ON” and press iENTER.

ENTER
i
Pressing
macro First Second
Press a macro button (lRECEIVER A or
dInput selector) to perform the macro operation
2 “MACRO” and press iENTER.
RECEIVER A Turns on — assigned to the button. Press iCursor B / C repeatedly to select
AV1-7
V-AUX
this unit
Switches the
input source
AV1-7
V-AUX To exit the macro operation mode, press

3 “EDIT” and press iENTER.
to:
iCursor B / C to select “OFF” and press Press the macro button (lRECEIVER A or
TUN./CH
AUDIO1-4
PHONO
AUDIO1-4
PHONO
iENTER. 4 dInput selector) that you want to assign
the macro operations to.
MULTI MULTI
NOTES
USB USB • While the remote control is running a macro program Continues to the
SETUP
A NET NET (the transmission indicator flashes), it does not accept next page
any other operation.

DOCK DOCK
• Continue to aim the remote control at the component
TUNER TUNER the macro is operating until the macro operation is
[A]/[B] — complete.
En 117
SETUP
SOURCE RECEIVER
l
m Press the buttons for the functions you
Clearing configurations Press and hold iENTER for about 3
1 2
AV
3 4
b 5 want to include in the macro operation in
sequence.
Clear all changes made in each function set, such as
5 seconds.
When the clearing is successful, “OK” appears in the
learned functions, macros, renamed control area names
5 6 7 V-AUX
Press mSOURCE/RECEIVER to switch the display window.
AUDIO
d and setup remote control ID.
1 2 3 4
controlled component.
PHONO
DOCK
MULTI
TUNER
USB
[A]
NET
[B]
Example ■ Clearing function sets NOTES
• “NG” appears in the display window if clearing was
SCENE
Set the input source to AV2 → Turn on the DVD player
Press ASETUP. unsuccessful.
1 2 3 4 e → Turn on the video monitor
Step 1 (“MACRO1”): Press dAV2. 1 “SETUP” appears in the display window. • “ERROR” appears in the display window if you press
a button not indicated in the respective step, or if you
Step 2 (“MACRO2”): Press mSOURCE/RECEIVER
press more than one button simultaneously.
repeatedly to select the controlled component until Press iCursor B / C repeatedly to select
MACRO2 and AV2 alternately appear in the display.
And then, press bSOURCE A.
2 “CLEAR” and press iENTER.
ENTER
i
Step 3 (“MACRO3”): Press kA.
3 Press iCursor B / C repeatedly to select
the operations that you want to and press
6 mode.
Press iENTER for 3 seconds or longer to

6 confirm the program.
iENTER.
Operations assigned to the following modes can be
You can set up to 10 steps (10 functions). After you cleared.
have set 10 steps, “FULL” appears.
Operation modes
Press ASETUP again to exit from the setup LEARN, PRESET, RENAME, MACRO, RESET
7 menu.
k Press dInput selector, lRECEIVER A, or
NOTE
“ERROR” appears in the display window if you press 4 kA to select the desired clear mode. J1
more than one button simultaneously.
• “ALL” mode is set at first. When no mode is selected
in this step, settings of all modes are cleared.
• The other keys are used for the following operation
modes.
– “RENAME”: eSCENE key J2
– “MACRO”: Macro button (lRECEIVER A or
TUN./CH dInput selector)
ZONE SETUP
A J1 : “RESET” initializes the settings of all modes. When selecting
“RESET” in step 2, you cannot select the clear mode in step 4.
B J 2 : To clear the rename of each zone, press BZONE to select the
desired zone before step 1.
En 118
SETUP
SOURCE RECEIVER
l
■ Clearing the function learned for
each key
AV
1 2 3 4
Press ASETUP.
5
1
6
2
AUDIO
7
3
V-AUX
4 d
PHONO MULTI USB NET

DOCK TUNER [A] [B]
2 “ERASE” and press iENTER.
Press dInput selector, lRECEIVER A or

3 kA to select the mode for which remote
control key operation will be cleared.
Press iENTER.
ENTER
i
4 “PRES KEY” appears in the display window.
Press and hold the button you want to clear

5 for about 3 seconds.
If clearing is successful, “OK” appears in the display
window.
• To continue resetting other keys, repeat step 3 to 5.

• Once you clear a learned function, the button reverts to
k the factory setting (or to the manufacturer setting if
you have set remote control codes).

6 menu.
NOTES
• “NG” appears in the display window on the remote
control if clearing was unsuccessful.
TUN./CH
• “ERROR” appears in the display window if you press
more than one button simultaneously.
SETUP
A
En 119
SETUP
Simplified remote control ■ Setting the controlling zone of the simplified remote control
Use this feature to set the controlling zone (☞p. 131) and remote control ID (☞p. 122) of the
Use the supplied simplified remote control to make basic controls of this unit. simplified remote control.
Setting the remote control ID
• ID1: Press and hold D (left cursor) and 1 for 3 seconds.
SLEEP
Switches this unit to
• ID2: Press and hold D (left cursor) and 2 for 3 seconds.
standby mode automatically A (Power) Setting the controlling zone
after a specified period of Turns on or off this unit.
time has elapsed (sleep
• Main zone: Press and hold E (right cursor) and 1 for 3 seconds.
timer) (☞p. 13). • Zone2: Press and hold E (right cursor) and 2 for 3 seconds.
• Zone3: Press and hold E (right cursor) and 3 for 3 seconds.
SCENE
SCENE
Switch the input source and 1 2 3 4 ■ Replacing the battery in the simplified remote control
the sound program with a Change the battery when the operation range of the simplified remote control decreases.
single button (☞p. 49).
INPUT l / h
These buttons function as
INPUT Select the input source
well as the following identical
(☞p. 47). J1
buttons on the main remote
control.
ON SCREEN OPTION VOLUME
h ON SCREEN VOLUME +/-
i Cursor B / C / D / E Adjust the volume level Use a straight Replace the Close the cover.
(☞p. 47). pin to remove battery with a
i ENTER ENTER the cover. new CR2025
i RETURN battery.
MUTE
MUTE
p OPTION RETURN DISPLAY Mutes the audio output
q DISPLAY (☞p. 47). NOTES
• Insert the battery according to the polarity markings (+ and -).
Input source operation • If the batteries run out, immediately remove them from the simplified remote control to prevent an
PRESET PRESET
keys
Selects a preset station Operate song playback, explosion or acid leak.
(☞p. 63). stop and skip functions for • If a battery starts leaking, dispose of it immediately. Be careful not to let the leaking battery acid touch
USB or DOCK. your skin or clothing.
• Before inserting new batteries, wipe the compartment clean.
• Dispose of batteries according to your regional regulations.
Remove the insulation sheet

before using the remote control.
J 1 : To select the detailed input for USB or NET (PC, NET RADIO), use PRESET or SCENE function to select the desired one.
En 120
SETUP
Extended functionality that can be configured as needed (Advanced Setup menu)
The Advanced Setup menu can be used for unit initialization and other useful extended functions. The Advanced Setup menu can be operated as follows.
Displaying/Setting the Advanced Setup Press PROGRAM l / h repeatedly to select the item
Setting the impedance of speakers
menu 3 to be set from the following items.
In the Advanced Setup menu, you can set the following settings.
SPEAKERIMP.
Switch this unit to the standby mode.
8MIN
1 SPEAKER IMP.
REMOTE SENSOR
Sets the impedance of speakers.
Activate or deactivate the signal-receiving capability Changes the unit settings depending on the impedance of the
Press MAIN ZONE A while pressing and holding
of the remote control sensor. speakers connected. J2
2 STRAIGHT on the front panel. REMOTE CON AMP
TUNER FRQ
Changes the remote control ID of a receiver.
Selects one of the following FM/AM frequency steps.
6MIN Select the impedance when 6 Ω speakers are
Release STRAIGHT when “ADVANCED SETUP” is displayed connected.
STEP J1
on the front panel display. 8MIN (Default) Select the impedance when speakers above 8 Ω are
After a few seconds, the top menu items are displayed. TV FORMAT Specifies the TV’s color encoding format.
connected.
MONITOR CHECK Removes the up-scaling limitation on HDMI video
MAIN ZONE A STRAIGHT output.
RECOV./BACKUP Save and restore the settings of this unit.
Remote sensor
INITIALIZE Initializes various settings for this unit.
FIRM UPDATE Update the firmware of this unit.
VERSION Check the version of firmware currently installed on
REMOTESENSOR
this unit. ON
Activate or deactivate the signal-receiving capability of the remote
Press STRAIGHT repeatedly to select the value you control sensor on the front panel of this unit.
4 want to change.
ON (Default) Activate the signal-receiving capability of the remote
control sensor
PROGRAM l / h Switch this unit to the standby mode, and then
5 switch it on again. OFF Deactivate the signal-receiving capability of the
remote control sensor
The settings become effective and the unit is powered on.
“ON” is recommended in most cases.
J 1 : Asia and General models only.

J 2 : For detailed procedures of speaker impedance settings, refer to “Changing
speaker impedance” (☞p. 21).
En 121
SETUP
SOURCE RECEIVER
l
Avoiding crossing remote control ■ To change the remote control ID
signals when using multiple Press ASETUP again to exit from the
1 2
AV
3 4
Yamaha receivers Perform each of the following steps within 30 6 setup menu.
5 6 7 V-AUX seconds. Settings will be automatically stopped if
1 2
AUDIO
3 4 more than 30 seconds passes since the last Returns to ID1 after the remote control code is
PHONO MULTI USB NET operation. To reset, repeat from step 1. initialized (☞p. 118).
REMOTECONAMP
DOCK TUNER [A] [B]
ID1 Press ASETUP.

The remote control of the unit can only receive signals
from a receiver which has an identical ID (remote
1 Changing FM/AM frequency steps
(Asia and General models only)
control ID). When using multiple Yamaha AV receivers, Press iCursor B / C repeatedly to select
you can set each remote control with a unique remote 2 “PRESET” and press iENTER.

control ID for its corresponding receiver.
TUNER FRQ STEP
On the contrary, if you are setting the same remote Press lRECEIVER A and press
ENTER
i control ID for all receivers, you can use one remote
control to operate 2 receivers.
3 iENTER. AM9/FM50
You can select one of the following FM/AM frequency
Enter the desired remote control ID code. steps: J1
ID1 (Default) Receives the remote control signals set in
ID1.
4 To switch to ID1:
AM10/FM100 You can adjust the AM frequency by steps
Enter “5019” using uNumeric keys or
of 10kHz and FM by steps of 100kHz.
ID2 Receives the remote control signals set in iCursor B / C / D / E.
1 2 3 ID2. AM9/FM50 You can adjust the AM frequency by
TUN./CH To switch to ID2: (Default) steps of 9kHz and FM by steps of 50kHz.
4 5 6
u Enter “5020” using uNumeric keys or

7 8 9
ID1 is set for both remote control and receiver by iCursor B / C / D / E.

0
default. To avoid crossing remote control, change the
Changing TV format
SETUP
A Press iENTER to set the number.
remote control ID for both remote control and
receiver. 5 “OK” appears in the display window if setting was

successful. TVFORMAT
“NG” appears in the display window if the setting NTSC
was unsuccessful. In this case, start over from step 4. Change the color encoding format of OSD to PAL or
NTSC, to match the format used by the TV connected
via the HDMI OUT 1-2 or VIDEO (MONITOR OUT)
jack.
J 1 : For details on setting FM/AM frequency steps, refer to “FM/AM

tuning” (☞p. 62).
En 122
SETUP
Removing HDMI video output up-scaling Recovery and backup of the system Initializing various settings for this unit
limits settings
INITIALIZE
MONITORCHECK RECOV./BACKUP CANCEL
YES BACKUP Initializes various settings stored in this unit and sets it back to
default.
Removes the up-scaling limitation on video resolution when this Save and restore the settings of this unit.
Select the items to be initialized from the following.
unit and a TV are connected via HDMI jacks.
Press STRAIGHT repeatedly to select “BACKUP” or
If a resolution supported by the monitor cannot be detected when
configuring the up-scaling settings, this setting will remove the 1 “RECOVERY” and press INFO on the front panel.
DSP PARAM
VIDEO
Initializes all parameters for the sound programs.
Resets video conversion settings (resolution/aspect

output limitation. ratio) in the Setup menu.
STRAIGHT
YES (Default) Video output signals of a resolution not supported by NETWORK Resets the settings of network such as IP address or
the TV will not be transmitted. the account of vTuner.
SKIP This unit ignores the TV’s support capability and ALL Resets this unit to default factory settings.
transmits input video signals to the TV. CANCEL (Default) Does not initialize.
When an option other than CANCEL is selected, the applicable

default settings will be restored when the unit switches to standby
mode.
INFO
RECOVERY Restores settings for this unit that have been saved.
BACKUP Saves the current settings of this unit.
Press INFO to execute the “BACKUP” or

2 “RECOVERY.” J1
“RECOVERY” cannot be selected if settings have not be

previously saved.
J 1 : After performing “RECOVERY,” turn off this unit.
En 123
SETUP
Firmware update Firmware version
FIRMUPDATE VERSION

USB xx.xxx
Update the firmware of this unit. For details on updating the Check the version of firmware currently installed on this unit.
firmware, refer to information supplied with updates.
When this unit detects the latest firmware over a network, the
About the latest firmware
When installing the latest firmware, the new functions or fix of
message indicating that the firmware is released is displayed in the
failure may be served.
System information (☞p. 110).
• The latest firmware can be downloaded from our website.
• While displaying the ON SCREEN menu or “System” from
Press STRAIGHT repeatedly to select “USB” or
1 “NETWORK.”
Information menu, the information on the latest firmware is
displayed via a network.
STRAIGHT
INFO
USB (Default) Updates the firmware of this unit using a USB flash
drive.
NETWORK Updates the firmware of this unit over a network.
Press INFO to start update with the selected option.

2
• Do not use this feature unless the firmware must be updated.
• Be sure to read the information supplied with updates before
updating firmware.
En 124
SETUP
Using the HDMI Control function
This unit supports the HDMI Control function, which allows you to
Connect the TV that supports the HDMI Control If BD/DVD player that supports the HDMI Control
operate external components via HDMI. If devices that support
HDMI Control (e.g., Panasonic VIERA Link-compatible TVs, 1 function to this unit’s HDMI output jack. 8 function are connected to this unit, turn them on.
DVD/Blu-ray Disc players, etc.) are connected J1, remote
Connect the BD/DVD player that supports the HDMI
2
controls for those devices can be used to perform the following This unit Confirm that the input source for the BD/DVD players
Control function to this unit’s HDMI input jack. has been selected. If a different input source has been
operations:
selected, change it manually.
– Power synchronization (on/standby)
Turn on the TV and this unit.
– Volume control, including Mute
– Changing the volume of the audio output signal device (either the 3 Refer to the TV’s instruction manual on how to operate external
TV and BD/DVD
player
Confirm that the video signal from the player is being
properly received by the TV.
TV or this unit) components.
Operations 1-8 will not be required more than twice. However,

Set the TV and this unit’s HDMI Control function to
TV
Control signal
4 “On.”
perform operations 1-8 again when switching the HDMI OUT
jack using Control Select.
(such as volume control) This unit Confirm that “HDMI Control” is set to “On”
(☞p. 101) and select the HDMI OUT jack connected
Confirm that this unit is properly synchronized with
HDMI connection
TV and BD/DVD
to the TV in “Control Select” (☞p. 101). J2
Check the instruction manuals for those devices.

9 the TV through the following operations by using the
TV remote control.
player
HDMI • Power On/Off
• Volume Control
• Switching between audio output devices
Turn the TV off.
This unit
5 Other synchronized HDMI Control devices are turned off with the If this unit is not synchronized to the TV’s power operations,
Remote control of TV TV. If they are not synchronized, unplug the power cable of the check that the HDMI Control function is set to “On” for both
TV. devices.
If they will not properly synchronize, unplugging and re-
NOTE Turn the TV on. plugging the power cable of this unit and the TV may solve the
The following is an example of how to connect this unit, a TV,
and a BD/DVD player. Follow the instructions in your TV and
6 Confirm that this unit has turned on in conjunction with the TV. If
problem.
it is still off, turn it on manually.
BD/DVD player manuals, as well as the ones written below.
– Set the TV’s HDMI Control function to “On”
Change the TV’s input setting to the input jack that
– Follow the AV amplifier connection instructions, and connect
this unit to the TV 7 is connected to this unit (e.g., AV1).
J 1 : We recommend that you use TVs and BD/DVD players from the same
manufacturer whenever possible.
J 2 : The default setting for the HDMI Control function is “Off.”
En 125
SETUP
SOURCE RECEIVER
■ Switching the input source on this To use other jacks to input audio signals from TV, carry
Press hON SCREEN. J1
1 2
AV
3 4
unit automatically when listening
to TV audio
out the following procedure.
3
Connect this unit and the TV with an HDMI
5
1
6
2
AUDIO
7
3
V-AUX
4
When the HDMI Control (☞p. 125) is operating
properly, the input source of this unit is automatically 1 cable.
4 Press iCursor B / C repeatedly to select
“Setup” and press iENTER.
PHONO MULTI USB NET
changed to match operations carried out on the TV.
Connect TV’s audio output to this unit.
DOCK TUNER [A] [B]
When the TV is connected with HDMI OUT 1, the
default input jack is AUDIO1. If the AUDIO1 optical 2 The input jacks listed below are available to input TV’s
digital jack is connected to the TV’s audio output jack, audio signals. Use the same jack type as used for the
then you can enjoy TV sound through this unit right TV.
away.
TV output jack Input jack
h DOCK NETWORK
HDMI OUT Optical digital audio output AUDIO1
1 2 AV 1
(1 BD/DVD)
Audio output
ARC SELECTABLE ARC
ON SCREEN
(Optical)
AV 1
(1 BD/DVD)
AV 2 AV 3 AV 4
AV OUT MON.OUT/ZONE OUT
AV 1
Y PB
COMPONEN
PR
Coaxial digital audio output AUDIO2
A
PHONO
GND
AV 2
OPTICAL
B
Analog stereo output AUDIO1, AUDIO2, AUDIO3, or
i Press iCursor D / E repeatedly to select
5
ENTER AUDIO 1 AUDIO 2 AUDIO 3 AUDIO 4 MULTI CH
(2 TV) (3 CD)
O AUDIO4
“HDMI” and press iENTER.
FRONT SURROUND
ZONE2/ZONE3
O
TV ANTENNA
Available input jacks
FM (4 RADIO)GND AM
75
EXTRA SP2 DOCK NETWORK HDMI

HDMI OUT
1 2 AV 1 AV 2 AV 3 AV 4 AV 5
AV 1 AV 2 AV 3 AV 4 COMPONENT VIDEO
(1 BD/DVD) AV OUT MON.OUT/ZONE OUT Y PB PR Y AV 3 PB C PR
AV 1
PHONO
Y PB PR IN
GND
AV 2
When the TV is connected with HDMI OUT 2, the AUDIO 1

(2 TV)
AUDIO 2
(3 CD)
B

AV 4
CENTER
D
ZONE OUT PRE OUT (SINGLE)
default input jack is AUDIO3. If the AUDIO3 optical

digital jack is connected to the TV’s audio output jack, a COAXIAL b COAXIAL c OPTICAL d OPTICAL e OPTICAL f COAXIAL
ZONE2/ZONE3
FRONT SURROUND SUR. BACK SUBWOOFER
SURROUND
ZONE 2 ZONE 3
FRONT/
F. PRESENCE
SPEAKERS
SURROUND BACK/
BI-AMP
SURROUND SUR. BACK
then you can enjoy TV sound through this unit right ANTENNA
FM (4 RADIO)GND AM
75
away.
EXTRA SP2 SINGLE Continues to the
next page
J 1 : Refer to the “Setting various functions (Setup menu)” (☞p. 92)

for details on the Setup menu.
En 126
SETUP
SOURCE RECEIVER
■ Single HDMI cable input to TV

Make sure that “HDMI Control” is “On” Press hON SCREEN. J1
AV
6 When “HDMI Control” is set to “Off,” press
audio with Audio Return Channel
function 2
1 2 3 4
iENTER and iCursor B / C to set to “On.” When using a TV that supports HDMI functions and
3
5 6 7 V-AUX
AUDIO
Audio Return Channel function, audio/video output
1 2 3 4 “Setup” and press iENTER.
Press iCursor B / C to select “Control
PHONO
DOCK
MULTI
TUNER
USB
[A]
NET
[B]
7 Select” and press iENTER.
from this unit to the TV or audio output from the TV to
this unit can be transmitted through a single HDMI cable
(Audio Return Channel function). Audio signals
Use iCursor B / C to select the HDMI OUT
8 jack connected to the TV and press
iENTER.
transmitted from the TV to this unit can be assigned to
any input source.
Connect this unit and the TV with an HDMI

h
9 Press iCursor B / C to select “TV Audio
Input” and press iENTER.
1 cable.
ON SCREEN
Use iCursor B / C to select the input

i
10 4 Press iCursor D / E repeatedly to select
ENTER
TV
jack connected in step 2. HDMI
“HDMI” and press iENTER.
Press hON SCREEN when you have HDMI
11 finished changing the settings.

If the TV hereafter transmits audio output signals, Video / Audio TV audio
this unit will automatically switch to the input output output
source chosen in step 10. HDMI
NETWORK HDMI
HDMI OUT
1 2 AV 1 AV 2 AV 3 AV 4
AV 2 AV 3 AV 4 COMPONENT VIDEO
AV OUT MON.OUT/ZONE OUT Y PB PR Y AV 3 PB C PR
AV 1
A MONITOR OUT/ZONE
Y PB
AV 2
B
AV 4 D
AUDIO 1
(2 TV)
AUDIO 2
(3 CD)
CENTER ZONE OUT Continues to the
next page
FRONT/
J 1 : Refer to the “Setting various functions (Setup menu)” (☞p. 92)

for details on the Setup menu.
En 127
SETUP
SOURCE RECEIVER
Make sure that “HDMI Control” is “On.”

AV
5 When “HDMI Control” is set to “Off,” press
1 2 3 4
iENTER and iCursor B / C to set to “On.”
5 6 7 V-AUX
AUDIO
1 2 3 4
Press iCursor B / C to select “Control
PHONO
DOCK
MULTI
TUNER
USB
[A]
NET
[B]
6 Select” and press iENTER.
Use iCursor B / C to select the HDMI OUT

7 jack connected to the TV and press
iENTER.
h Press iCursor B / C to select “TV Audio
ON SCREEN
8 Input” and press iENTER.
Use iCursor B / C to select the input

i
9
ENTER
source to which the HDMI audio signals will

RETURN
be assigned, and press iRETURN.
Press iCursor B / C to select “ARC

10 (Audio Return Channel)” and press
iENTER. J1
Press iCursor C to select “On.”

11 The Audio Return Channel function will turn on.
Press hON SCREEN to close the Setup

12 menu.
If the TV hereafter transmits audio output signals,
this unit will automatically switch to the input
source chosen in step 9.
J 1 : While the Audio Return Channel function is on, the jack selected
for the input source cannot be used.
En 128
SETUP
Enjoying the contents in another room
This unit allows you to configure a multi-zone audio system. The multi-zone feature allows you to set this unit to reproduce separate input sources in the main zone and the second zone (Zone2) and
third zone (Zone3). You can control this unit from the second zone or third zone using the supplied remote control.
From the ZONE3 OUT jacks From the ZONE2 OUT jacks ■ When using the external amplifier
An amplifier located in the second and third zones can be connected to this unit as shown below.
Audio input
Amplifier Amplifier
AUDIO
Third zone Main zone Second zone L
(Zone3) (Zone2)
R
DVD player (etc.) HDMI RS-232C
AV 3 AV 4 AV 5 AV 6 AV 7
Remote control Remote control

TRIGGER
This unit PB C PR OUT
Power amplifier MONITOR OUT/ZONE OUT

1
REMOTE
2
1
Infrared signal Y PB PR IN OUT IN OUT
2
Infrared signal emitter Infrared signal Second Zone D +12V 0.1A MAX.
receiver receiver (Zone2) ENTER ZONE OUT PRE OUT (SINGLE) (FRONT)
1
L L
2
R R
FRONT/ ((REAR))
BWOOFER ZONE 2 ZONE 3 F. PRESENCE SURROUND SUR. BACK SUBWOOFER CENTER
From the REMOTE OUT jack To the REMOTE IN jack Audio input UND
SPEAKERS
SURROUND BACK/
BI-AMP
CENTER FRONT ZONE2/ZONE3/
F.PRESENCE
AC IN
To the REMOTE IN jack AUDIO

L
R
Only analog signal can be sent to Zone2 or Zone3. If you want to output sound from Zone2 or SINGLE EXTRA SP1
Zone3, connect an external component to AV1-4, AUDIO1-4 or V-AUX by analog connection. For
example, if you want to output sound from an HDMI DVD player in Zone2, you must connect the
Power amplifier
component to this unit by both HDMI and analog connections.
Third Zone
(Zone3)
Connecting Zone2 or Zone3
To avoid unexpected noise, DO NOT USE the multi-zone feature with CDs encoded in DTS.
You need the following additional equipment to use the multi-zone functions of this unit:
• An infrared signal receiver in the second zone and/or third zone.
• An infrared signal emitter in the main zone. This emitter transmits infrared signals from the remote control ■ When using the internal amplifier of this unit
to a CD player or a DVD player, etc. in the main zone via the infrared signal receiver in the second zone Connect the speakers in the second zone and/or third zone to the EXTRA SP jacks directly (☞p. 21).
and/or third zone.
• An amplifier and speakers in the second zone and/or third zone.
• A TV in the second zone or third zone.
Since there are many possible ways to connect and use this unit in a multi-zone configuration, we
recommend that you consult with your nearest authorized Yamaha dealer or service center about the
multi-zone connections that best meet your requirements.
En 129
SETUP
■ Connecting zone video monitors ■ Features of the Zone2/Zone3 OSD

Connect the video monitor(s) in Zone2, Zone3 to MONITOR OUT/ZONE OUT jacks. If you connect When “Monitor Out Assign” is set to “Zone2” or “Zone3,” the Zone2 or Zone3 OSD is displayed on
the multiple zone video monitors to these jacks, the video monitors play back the selected input source the TV monitor in Zone2 or Zone3.
for the assigned zone. The Zone2 or Zone3 OSD differ from the main OSD by available features. The available features for
Zone2 or Zone3 OSD are as follows.
To assign the MONITOR OUT/ZONE OUT jacks to Zone2 or Zone3, configure “Monitor Out
✓: available feature
Assign” (☞p. 104).
Features Main OSD Zone OSD
Source component Input menu Selecting Input ✓ —
Configuring Input ✓ —
Sound Program Selecting Sound Program ✓ —

menu
MON.OUT/ZONE OUT
Y
PB PR
Configuring Sound Program ✓ —
ON SCREEN menu
Scene menu Selecting Scene ✓ —
This unit
Configuring Scene ✓ —
Setup menu ✓ —
Information menu ✓ —
Video in V or Y PB PR Component video in
Now Playing view ✓ ✓
Content window
e.g., Zone2
Browse view ✓ ✓
Tone Control, Repeat J1, Shuffle J1 ✓ ✓

Option menu
Other functions ✓ —
Video monitor
■ Controlling this unit with the remote control in other rooms

This unit is equipped with two REMOTE IN and REMOTE OUT jacks. These jacks can be used to
control this unit and other components from Zone2 and Zone3 (☞p. 36).
When “Monitor Out Assign” is set to “Zone2” or “Zone3,” the content window and Option menu of Some Yamaha models can be directly connected to the REMOTE jacks of this unit. These models may not require
the input selected for the assigned zone can also be displayed on the TV monitor in the assigned an infrared signal emitter. Up to 6 Yamaha components can be connected as shown below.
zone. REMOTE REMOTE REMOTE
IN OUT IN OUT
Infrared signal This unit Yamaha

receiver component
J 1 : Only when selecting DOCK/PC/USB, Repeat and Shuffle can be displayed.
En 130
SETUP
SOURCE RECEIVER
l
Controlling Zone2 or Zone3 To enable the sleep timer for Zone2 or Zone3 ■ Controlling the content window on
Automatically switch the Zone2 or Zone3 device to the TV monitor in another room
AV standby mode after a specified period of time has elapsed When “Monitor Out Assign” is set to “Zone2” or
1 2 3 4
The remote control can be used to select and control
(sleep timer). Press ySLEEP repeatedly to specify a “Zone3,” the following items can be set with Option
5 6 7 V-AUX
Zone2 or Zone3 devices. The available operations are as
time for the sleep timer function. menu in the Zone2 or Zone3.
d follows:
AUDIO
1 2 3 4
• Selecting the input source of Zone2 or Zone3. • Adjusting the Tone Control for the Zone2 or Zone3.
PHONO MULTI USB NET
120min. 90min.
DOCK TUNER [A] [B] • Tuning into FM or AM when “TUNER” is selected as the • Setting the Repeat and Shuffle functions. (only when
SCENE input source of Zone2 or Zone3. Off 30min. 60min. selecting DOCK/PC/USB)
1 2 3 4 e • Adjust the volume of Zone2 or Zone3 devices (when
connected via the built-in amplifier). ■ Adjusting Zone2 or Zone3 high-/ NOTE
low-frequency sound (Tone The Option menu in Zone2 or Zone3 can be
■ Activating the Zone2 or Zone3 Control) controlled with the same operation as for controlling
operation mode the Option menu for the main zone (☞p. 57).
Press ZONE CONTROL on the front panel.
Press BZONE to ZONE2 or ZONE3 before attempting
to use the remote control to control Zone2 or Zone3 1 Enjoying the music in all rooms
devices.
Press TONE/BALANCE on the front panel
■ Operating Zone2 or Zone3 2 repeatedly to select “Treble” or “Bass.”
Use this feature to play main zone sources in other zones
simultaneously. This feature is useful when you want to
To enable and disable the audio output to Zone2
v play back main sources as background music in a home
Press PROGRAM l / h to adjust the output
PARTY
or Zone3
Press lRECEIVER A. 3 level in the applicable frequency range.
party, etc. When using the party mode, set “Party Mode
Set” to “Enable” (☞p. 104).
TUN./CH
To select an input source for Zone2 or Zone3 Adjustable range -10.0 dB to +10.0 dB
Press vPARTY to turn on or off the party mode.
SLEEP
y Press dInput selector. Adjustment 2.0 dB “Party Mode On” or “Party Mode Off” appears on the
Only the following sources are available for increments front panel display or the TV screen.
ZONE
B Zone2 or Zone3. While this unit is in the party mode, the PARTY
AV1-4 (only analog audio input), V-AUX (only The display returns to the previous display soon after the indicators turn on in the front panel display.
analog audio input), AUDIO1-4 (only analog audio key is released.
• Input audio signals are mixed down to 2ch Stereo and
input), PHONO, USB, NET, DOCK, TUNER
■ Adjusting Zone2 and Zone3 front output at the analog ZONE2 OUT or ZONE3 OUT
speaker balance jacks.
To use SCENE function for Zone2 or Zone3 • Party mode can be turned on only when the power of
Press and hold eSCENE key for about 3 seconds to Press ZONE CONTROL on the front panel.
register the current setting to the scene. 1 main zone is turned on.
• Party mode automatically turns off when the power of
Press eSCENE key to load the registered setting. main zone is turned off.
Press TONE/BALANCE on the front panel
The following settings can be registered
for each scene of the Zone2 or Zone3.
2 repeatedly to select “Balance.”
Input, Master Volume, Tone Control Press PROGRAM l / h to adjust balance.

3 The display returns to the previous display soon after
the key is released.
En 131
APPENDIX
Troubleshooting
Refer to the table below when this unit does not function properly.
If the problem you are experiencing is not listed below, or if the instructions below do not help, turn off this unit, disconnect the power cable, and contact the nearest authorized Yamaha dealer or service
center.
General
See See
Problem Cause Remedy Problem Cause Remedy
page page
The power will not The protection circuitry operated As a safety precaution, when the protection — After display of a If you do not use take any action, Turn on the unit, and play the source again. —
turn on. 3 times consecutively. circuitry operates 3 times consecutively, the countdown on the the Auto Power Down function
In the Setup menu “Auto Power Down” 106
capability to turn on the power is disabled. front panel, the unit operates.
(“Function” → “Auto Power Down”),
Contact your nearest Yamaha dealer or goes into standby
increase the time until switching to standby
service center to request repair. mode.
mode, or turn off the Auto Power Down
The unit enters The power cable is not completely Connect the power cable properly to an AC — function.
standby mode soon inserted. wall outlet.
No sound. Incorrect input or output cable Connect the cables properly. If the problem 30
after the power is
(When this unit is turned back on Make sure that all speaker cables between 22 connections. persists, the cables may be defective.
turned on.
and “CHECK SP WIRES!” is this unit and speakers are connected
Speaker connections are not Secure the connections. 22
displayed.) The protection properly.
secure.
circuitry has been activated
because this unit was turned on The HDMI components connected Connect HDMI components that support the —
while a speaker cable was shorted. to the unit do not support the HDCP copy protection standards.
HDCP copy protection standards.
This unit cannot be The internal microcomputer is Disconnect the power cable from the AC —
turned off or does hung-up due to an external electric wall outlet, wait about 30 seconds and then The audio input into the device is In the Setup menu, set the “Amp” of “Audio 102
not work properly. shock (such as lightning or plug it in again. set to playback through the TV. Output” (“HDMI” → “Audio Output” →
excessive static electricity) or by a “Amp”) to “On.”
drop in power supply voltage.
No appropriate input source has Select an appropriate input source with 47
The batteries in the remote control Replace all batteries. 13 been selected. Input selector.
may have lost their charge.
The volume is turned down or Turn up the volume. —
The unit enters The protection circuitry has been Check that the speaker with an impedance — muted.
standby mode. activated because of a short circuit, of at least 6 Ω.
Signals that this unit cannot Use an input source that has signals that can —
etc.
Check that the speaker impedance settings 21 reproduce are being input from a be reproduced on this unit.
are correct. source component, such as a CD-
ROM.
Check that the speaker wires are not —
touching each other, then turn the unit back
on.
The sleep timer has turned off the Turn on the unit, and play the source again. —
unit.
En 132
APPENDIX Troubleshooting
See See
Problem Cause Remedy Problem Cause Remedy
page page
No picture. The video signal output from this Displays the Advanced Setup menu and 123 Only the center When a monaural source sound Try another sound program. 50
unit is not supported by a monitor select “VIDEO” in “INITIALIZE” to reset speaker outputs program is applied, for some
connected to this unit via the the video parameters. substantial sound. surround decoders, sound from all
HDMI OUT 1-2 jacks. channels is output from the center
Displays the Advanced Setup menu and set 123
speaker.
“MONITOR CHECK” to “YES.”
No sound is heard This unit is in straight decoding Press STRAIGHT to exit straight decoding 51
An appropriate video input is not Select an appropriate video input on the TV. —
from the presence mode and the audio input signals mode.
selected on the TV.
speakers. have no surround channel.
No sound is output The speaker is malfunctioning. If sound is not output, the unit may be 11
Sound may not be output from Try another sound program. 50
from a specific Check the Speaker indicators on malfunctioning.
certain channels depending on
speaker. the front panel display. If the
input sources or sound programs.
corresponding indicator lights up,
connect another speaker and check No sound is heard Sound may not be output from Try another sound program. 50
if sound is output. from the surround certain channels depending on
speakers. input sources or sound programs.
The playback component or Connect the cables properly. If the problem 22, 30
speakers are not connected persists, the cables may be defective. No sound is heard “Extended Surround” in the Set “Extended Surround” other than “Off” 59
properly. from the surround Option menu is set to “Off,” or an or “Auto.”
back speakers. input signal does not contain a
Output from that speaker is Check the Speaker indicators on the front 11, 94
surround back flag with “Extended
disabled. panel display. If the corresponding indicator
Surround” set to “Auto.”
is turned off, try the following.
1) Change to a different input source. No sound is heard A subwoofer is not connected, or it Check that a subwoofer is connected 22, 95
2) With the selected sound program, sound from the subwoofer. is inactive. correctly, and from the Setup menu
is not output from that speaker. Select “Subwoofer1” and “Subwoofer2”
another sound program. (“Speaker” → “Manual Setup” →
3) “None” may have been selected for that “Configuration” → “Subwoofer1” and
speaker on this unit. Display “Speaker” in “Subwoofer2”), set the subwoofer to “Use.”
the Setup menu, and set respective
The subwoofer is turned off. Turn the subwoofer power on. —
parameters to enable output from that
If the subwoofer includes an Auto Power
speaker (“Speaker” → “Manual Setup” →
Off function, then lower the Auto Power Off
“Configuration”).
sensitivity settings.
The volume of that speaker is set Display “Speaker” in the Setup menu and 96
The source does not contain LFE —
to the minimum in “Speaker” in adjust the volume (“Speaker” → “Manual
(☞p. 140) or low frequency
the Setup menu. Setup” → “Level”).
signals.
(If hardly any sound comes from Balance the volume of each speaker from 96
The audio input The connected component is not Set the playback component properly —
one channel) “Level” in the Setup menu (“Speaker” →
sources cannot be set to output the desired digital referring to its instruction manual.
Speaker output balance is not set “Manual Setup” → “Level”).
played in the desired audio signals.
correctly.
digital audio signal
Sound may not be output from Try another sound program. 50 format.
certain channels, depending on the
input source or sound program.
En 133
Problem Cause Remedy

See HDMI™
page
There is noise This unit is too close to other Move this unit further away from such —
See
interference from digital or radio frequency equipment. Problem Cause Remedy
page
digital or radio equipment.
frequency The front panel An error with the HDMI Try re-inserting the HDMI cable. —
equipment. display HDMI connection has occurred.
Confirm that HDMI video that is not 109
indicator is flashing.
Noise/hum noise is Incorrect cable connection. If the problem persists, the cables may be — supported by the unit is not being input
heard. Connect the audio cables properly. defective. (Information menu → “Video Signal
information”).
A DTS-CD is being played back. 1) When only noise is output —
If a DTS bitstream signal is not properly No picture or sound. The number of components is over Disconnect some of the HDMI components. —
input to this unit, only noise is output. the limit.
Connect the playback component to this
The connected HDMI component Connect an HDMI component that supports —
unit by digital connection and playback the
does not support high-bandwidth HDCP.
DTS-CD. If the condition is not improved,
digital copyright protection
the problem may results from the playback
(HDCP).
component. Consult the manufacturer of the
playback component. (When using HDMI The TV audio output is not Connect the TV audio output to this unit, 101
2) When noise is output during playback or Control function) connected to this unit, or the and then select the connected input source
skip operation TV sound is not setting to match operations carried in “TV Audio Input” (Setup menu → HDMI
Before playing back the DTS-CD, display output from this unit out on TV is not set. → TV Audio Input).
the Input menu after selecting the input when operating the
(When using Audio Return Make sure that your TV supports Audio 101
source and set “Decoder Mode” to “DTS.” remote control of the
Channel function) Return Channel.
TV.
The volume cannot The component connected to the When the component connected to the — The Audio Return Channel Set the Audio Return Channel function to
be increased, or the output jacks of this unit is not output jacks of this unit is not turned on, the function is not working. on (Setup menu → HDMI → ARC (Audio
sound is distorted. turned on. sound may be distorted, or the volume may Return Channel)).
decreased due to the nature of AV receivers.
Turn on all components connected to this
unit.
“Max Volume” is set to a low Set it to a higher value. 98

value.
En 134
Tuner (FM/AM) AM
See
Problem Cause Remedy
FM page
The desired station The signal is weak, or the antenna Adjust the AM loop antenna orientation. —
See
Problem Cause Remedy cannot be tuned into connections are loose.
page Use the manual tuning method. 62
with the automatic
FM stereo reception You are too far from the station Check the antenna connections. 39 tuning method.
is noisy. transmitter, or the input from the
Switch to monaural mode. 64 Automatic station Automatic station preset is not Use manual station preset. 62
antenna is weak.
Replace the outdoor antenna with a more — preset does not available for AM stations.
sensitive multi-element antenna. work.
There is distortion, There is multi-path interference. Adjust the antenna height or orientation, or — Continuous The supplied AM loop antenna is Connect the AM loop antenna correctly 39
and clear reception place it in a different location. crackling and not connected. even if you use an outdoor antenna.
cannot be obtained hissing noises are
The noises may be caused by It is difficult to completely eliminate noise, —
even with a good FM heard.
lightning, fluorescent lamps, but it can be reduced by installing and
antenna. motors, thermostats, or other properly grounding an outdoor AM antenna.
The desired station You are in an area far from a Replace the outdoor antenna with a more — electrical equipment.
cannot be tuned into station, or input from the antenna sensitive multi element antenna. Buzzing and whining A TV set is being used nearby. Move this unit away from the TV set. —
with the automatic is weak. noises are heard.
Use TUN./CH H / I to manually select the 62
tuning method.
station.
“No Presets” is No preset stations are registered. Register stations you want to listen to as 63
displayed. preset stations before operation.
“Wrong Station” is An invalid FM/AM frequency has Input a frequency that can be received. —
displayed. been input.
En 135
USB and Network Problem Cause Remedy

See
page
The Internet Radio The firewall of the network device Check the firewall setting of the network —
See
Problem Cause Remedy cannot be played. is activated. The Internet Radio device.
page
can be played only when it passes
“No Device” is This unit recognized the USB Turn this unit off then on again. — through the port designated by
displayed even when storage device as an illegal device. each radio station. The port
a USB device is number is variable depending on
present. radio station.
The music files and The music files and directories are Place music files and directories in the FAT — Connection to the Internet is Check the configuration of the network —
directories in the placed in locations other than the area. disconnected. device, and then contact the network
USB device cannot FAT area. connection provider.
be viewed.
You are attempting to browse Modify the data structure on your USB —
directory hierarchies of over 8 device.
See
levels or a directory with more Display Cause Remedy
page
than 500 files.
Connect error There is a problem with the signal Check the connection between this unit and 37
The PC server/ The IP address is not set properly. Set the DHCP server function of the router 103 path from your network to this the LAN port on your router or hub.
Internet Radio does to ON. Alternately, perform manual unit.
not function configuration according to the current Make sure your router is properly connected 37
properly. operating environment. and turned on. Also, make sure your modem
is properly connected and turned on when
The network cable is not Connect it properly. 37 you are attempting to listen to Internet
connected. Radio.
The music in the PC The PC does not have Windows Install Windows Media Player in the PC. — Disconnected Your USB storage device or USB Check the connection between this unit and —
server cannot be Media Player installed in it. portable audio player has been your USB storage device or USB portable
played back. disconnected from the USB port of audio player.
The music is recorded in a format Play music recorded in a format that this —
that cannot be played on this unit. unit is compatible with. this unit.
This unit cannot play music The PC server previously Connect this unit to the available PC server. 37
formats other than WMA, MP3, connected to this unit no longer
MPEG-4 AAC, FLAC, and WAV exists.
(PCM format). Also note that it
cannot play certain music files No Device There is a problem with the signal Turn off this unit and reconnect your USB 38
even if these are recorded in the path from your USB storage storage device or USB portable audio player
WMA, MP3, MPEG-4 AAC, device or USB portable audio to the USB port of this unit.
FLAC, or WAV format. player to this unit.
Try resetting your USB storage device or —
USB portable audio player.
En 136
Display Cause Remedy

See iPod™/iPhone™
page
Access error This unit cannot access your USB Try another USB storage device or USB —
See
storage device or USB portable portable audio player. Display Cause Remedy
page
audio player.
Loading... The unit is in the process of —
There is a problem with the signal Turn off this unit and reconnect your USB 38
recognizing the connection with
path from your USB storage storage device or USB portable audio player
your iPod/iPhone.
device or USB portable audio to the USB port of this unit.
player to this unit. The unit is in the middle of —
Try resetting your USB storage device or —
acquiring song lists from your
USB portable audio player.
iPod/iPhone.
Access denied The PC you are attempting to Configure the sharing setting of Window 66
Connect error There is a problem with the signal Turn off the unit and reconnect the 73
connect has denied connection. Media Player 11/12 and select this unit as a
path from your iPod/iPhone to the Universal Dock for iPod to the DOCK jack
device to which music contents are shared.
unit. of the unit.
Unable to play This unit cannot play back the Make sure Windows Media Player is —
Remove your iPod/iPhone from the 73
songs currently stored on your PC. installed on your PC.
Universal Dock for iPod and then place it
Check that the songs currently stored on — back in the dock.
your PC are playable (MP3, WMA, MPEG-
Unknown iPod The iPod/iPhone being used is not Connect an iPod/iPhone supported by the —
4 AAC, and WAV).
supported by the unit. unit.
Store some other playable music files (MP3, —
iPod connected Your iPod/iPhone is properly —
WMA, MPEG-4 AAC, and WAV) on your
placed in the Universal Dock for
PC.
iPod.
The network may be overloaded Try preparing a network exclusively for use —
Your iPod/iPhone is properly 75
with heavy traffic, and playback is with this unit to separate it from general
placed in the transmitter of the
interrupted. network traffic.
Yamaha Wireless System for iPod
List updated The list of the contents stored on — and connected with this unit via
your PC server has been updated. wireless transmission.
Bookmark On The desired Internet Radio station — Disconnected Your iPod/iPhone is removed from —
has been added to the Bookmarks the Universal Dock for iPod.
list.
Your iPod/iPhone is disconnected —
Bookmark Off The stored Internet Radio station — with this unit via wireless
has been removed from the transmission.
Bookmarks list.
Unable to play The unit cannot playback the Check that songs are currently stored on —
USB Overloaded Over current passes through the Turn off this unit and then disconnect the — songs currently stored on your your iPod/iPhone.
connected USB device. USB device. If the message appears when iPod/iPhone.
you connect the USB device again, this unit
may not compatible with the USB device.
En 137
Bluetooth™ Remote control
See See
Display Cause Remedy Problem Cause Remedy
page page
Searching... The Yamaha Bluetooth Wireless — The remote control Wrong distance or angle. The remote control will function within a —
Audio Receiver and the Bluetooth does not work or maximum range of 6 m, and no more than
component are in the process of function properly. 30 degrees off-axis from the front panel.
pairing.
Direct sunlight or lighting (from Adjust the lighting angle, or reposition this —
The Yamaha Bluetooth Wireless — an inverter type of fluorescent unit.
Audio Receiver and the Bluetooth lamp, strobe light, etc.) is striking
component are in the process of the remote control sensor of this
establishing a connection. unit.
Completed The pairing is completed. — The batteries are weak. Replace all batteries. 13
Canceled The pairing is canceled. — The remote control ID of the Match the remote control ID of this unit and 112
remote control and this unit do not the remote control. 122
BT connected The connection between the —
match.
Yamaha Bluetooth Wireless Audio
Receiver and the Bluetooth The battery of The power of battery is not Replace the battery with alkaline battery. —
component is established. remote control runs enough.
out immediately.
Disconnected The Bluetooth component is —
disconnected from the Yamaha External components The remote control code is not Set the remote control code correctly using —
Bluetooth Wireless Audio cannot be controlled correctly set. “Remote control code search” on the CD-
Receiver. using the remote ROM.
control.
Not found The Bluetooth component is not During pairing: — Try setting another code for the same —
found. – pairing must be performed on the manufacturer using “Remote control code
Bluetooth component and this unit search” on the CD-ROM.
simultaneously. Check if the Bluetooth
If this unit does not work when you press —
component is in pairing mode.
Cursor B / C / D / E, do the following.
During connecting:
When the key does not work during DVD
– check if the Bluetooth component is
disc menu operation: press the Input
turned on.
selector again.
– check if the Bluetooth component is
When there is no response with remote
within 10 m of the Yamaha Bluetooth
control operation of the Option menu/Setup
Wireless Audio Receiver.
menu: press SOURCE/RECEIVER (it
Pairing may not have been Try pairing again. 77 should glow orange) and try operating the
achieved. remote control again.
Even if the remote control code is —

correctly set, there are some
models that do not respond to the
remote control.
En 138
APPENDIX
Glossary
Audio information Dolby Digital Plus DTS 96/24

Dolby Digital Plus is an advanced audio technology developed for high- DTS 96/24 offers an unprecedented level of audio quality for multichannel
definition programming and media including HD broadcasts, and Blu-ray sound on DVD video, and is fully backward-compatible with all DTS
Audio and video synchronization (Lipsync) Disc. Selected as an optional audio standard for Blu-ray Disc, this decoders. “96” refers to a 96 kHz sampling rate compared to the typical
Lip sync, an abbreviation for lip synchronization, is a technical term that technology delivers multichannel sound with discrete channel output. 48 kHz sampling rate. “24” refers to 24-bit word length. DTS 96/24 offers
involves both a problem and a capability of maintaining audio and video Supporting bitrates up to 6.0 Mbps, Dolby Digital Plus can carry up to 7.1 sound quality transparent to the original 96/24 master, and 96/24 5.1-
signals synchronized during post-production and transmission. Whereas the discreet audio channels simultaneously. Supported by HDMI version 1.3 channel sound with full-quality full-motion video for music programs and
audio and video latency requires complex end-user adjustments, HDMI and designed for the optical disc players and AV receivers/amplifiers of the motion picture soundtracks on DVD video.
version 1.3 incorporates an automatic audio and video syncing capability future, Dolby Digital Plus also remains fully compatible with the existing
that allows devices to perform this synchronization automatically and DTS Digital Surround
multichannel audio systems that incorporate Dolby Digital.
accurately without user interaction. DTS digital surround was developed to replace the analog soundtracks of
Dolby Pro Logic II movies with a 5.1-channel digital sound track, and is now rapidly gaining
Bi-amplification connection (Bi-amp) Dolby Pro Logic II is an improved technique used to decode vast numbers popularity in movie theaters around the world. DTS, Inc. has developed a
A bi-amplification connection uses two amplifiers for a speaker. One of existing Dolby Surround sources. This new technology enables a discrete home theater system so that you can enjoy the depth of sound and natural
amplifier is connected to the woofer section of a loudspeaker while the 5-channel playback with 2 front left and right channels, 1 center channel, spatial representation of DTS digital surround in your home. This system
other is connected to the combined mid and tweeter section. With this and 2 surround left and right channels, instead of only 1 surround channel produces practically distortion-free 6-channel sound (technically, front left
arrangement each amplifier operates over a restricted frequency range. This for conventional Pro Logic technology. There are three modes available: and right, center, surround left and right, and LFE 0.1 (subwoofer) channels
restricted range presents each amplifier with a much simpler job and each “Music mode” for music sources, “Movie mode” for movie sources, and for a total of 5.1 channels). This unit incorporates a DTS-ES decoder that
amplifier is less likely to influence the sound in some way. “Game mode” for game sources. enables 6.1-channel reproduction by adding the surround back channel to
Dolby Digital the existing 5.1-channel format.
Dolby Pro Logic IIx
Dolby Digital is a digital surround sound system that gives you completely Dolby Pro Logic IIx is a new technology enabling discrete multichannel DTS Express
independent multi-channel audio. With 3 front channels (front L/R and playback from 2-channel or multi-channel sources. There are three modes This is an audio format for next-generation optical discs such as Blu-ray
center), and 2 surround stereo channels, Dolby Digital provides 5 full-range available: “Music mode” for music sources, “Movie mode” for movie discs. It uses optimized low bit rate signals for network streaming. In the
audio channels. With an additional channel especially for bass effects, sources (for 2-channel sources only) and “Game mode” for game sources. case of a Blu-ray disc, this format is used with secondary audio, enabling
called LFE (Low Frequency Effect), the system has a total of 5.1-channels you to enjoy the commentary of the movie producer via the Internet while
(LFE is counted as 0.1 channel). By using 2-channel stereo for the surround Dolby TrueHD
playing the main program.
speakers, more accurate moving sound effects and surround sound Dolby TrueHD is an advanced lossless audio technology developed for
environment are possible than with Dolby Surround. The wide dynamic high-definition disc-based media including Blu-ray Disc. Selected as an DTS-HD High Resolution Audio
range from maximum to minimum volume reproduced by the 5 full-range optional audio standard for Blu-ray Disc, this technology delivers sound DTS-HD High Resolution Audio is a high resolution audio technology
channels and the precise sound orientation generated using digital sound that is bit-for-bit identical to the studio master, offering a high-definition developed for high-definition disc-based media including Blu-ray Disc.
processing provide listeners with unprecedented excitement and realism. home theater experience. Supporting bitrates up to 18.0 Mbps, Dolby Selected as an optional audio standard for Blu-ray Disc, this technology
With this unit, any sound environment from monaural up to a 5.1- channel TrueHD can carry up to 8 discrete channels of 24-bit/96 kHz audio delivers sound that is virtually indistinguishable from the original, offering
configuration can be freely selected for your enjoyment. simultaneously. Dolby TrueHD also remains fully compatible with the a high-definition home theater experience.
existing multichannel audio systems and retains the metadata capability of Supporting bitrates up to 6.0 Mbps for Blu-ray Disc, DTS-HD High
Dolby Digital Surround EX Dolby Digital, allowing dialogue normalization and dynamic range control. Resolution Audio can carry up to 7.1 discrete channels of 24-bit/96 kHz
Dolby Digital EX creates 6 full-bandwidth output channels from 5.1- audio simultaneously.
channel sources. For the best results, Dolby Digital EX should be used with DTS-HD High Resolution Audio also remains fully compatible with the
movie sound tracks recorded with Dolby Digital Surround EX. With this existing multichannel audio systems that incorporate DTS Digital
additional channel, you can experience more dynamic and realistic moving Surround.
sound especially with scenes with “fly-over” and “flyaround” effects.
DTS-HD Master Audio optional audio standard for Blu-ray Disc, this technology delivers sound
DTS-HD Master Audio is an advanced lossless audio technology developed that is bit-for-bit identical to the studio master, offering a high-definition
for high-definition disc-based media including Blu-ray Disc. Selected as an home theater experience.
En 139
APPENDIX Glossary
Supporting bitrates up to 24.5 Mbps for Blu-ray Disc, DTS-HD Master
Audio can carry up to 7.1 discrete channels of 24-bit/96 kHz audio
LFE 0.1 channel Sound program information
This channel reproduces low-frequency bass signals, and has a frequency
simultaneously. Supported by HDMI version 1.3 and designed for the range from 20 Hz to 120 Hz. This channel is counted as 0.1, because it only
optical disc players and AV receivers/amplifiers of the future, DTS-HD enforces a low-frequency range compared to the full-range reproduced by CINEMA DSP
Master Audio also remains fully compatible with the existing multichannel the other 5-channels in Dolby Digital or DTS 5.1-channel systems. Since the Dolby Surround and DTS systems were originally designed for
audio systems that incorporate DTS Digital Surround. use in movie theaters, their effect is best felt in a theater having many
PCM (Linear PCM) speakers designed for acoustic effects. Since home conditions, such as
DTS Neo:6 Linear PCM is a signal format under which an analog audio signal is room size, wall material, number of speakers, and so on, can differ so
Neo:6 decodes the conventional 2-channel sources for 6- channel playback digitized, recorded and transmitted without using any compression. This is widely, it is inevitable that there are differences in the sound that is heard.
by the specific decoder. It enables playback with the fullrange channels used as a method of recording CDs and DVD audio. The PCM system uses Based on a wealth of actually measured data, Yamaha CINEMA DSP uses
with higher separation just like digital discrete signal playback. There are a technique for sampling the size of the analog signal per very small unit of Yamaha’s original DSP technology to combine Dolby Pro Logic, Dolby
two modes available: “Music mode” for music sources and “Cinema mode” time. Standing for “Pulse Code Modulation,” the analog signal is encoded Digital, and DTS systems to provide the audiovisual experience of a movie
for movie sources. as pulses and then modulated for recording. theater in the listening room of your own home.
DSD Sampling frequency and number of quantized bits CINEMA DSP 3D
Direct Stream Digital (DSD) technology stores audio signals on digital When digitizing an analog audio signal, the number of times the signal is The actually measured sound field data contain the information of the
storage media, such as Super Audio CDs. Using DSD, signals are stored as sampled per second is called the sampling frequency, while the degree of height of the sound images. CINEMA DSP 3D feature achieves the
single bit values at a high-frequency sampling rate of 2.8224 MHz, while fineness when converting the sound level into a numeric value is called the reproduction of the accurate height of the sound images so that it creates
noise shaping and oversampling are used to reduce distortion, a common number of quantized bits. The range of rates that can be played back is the accurate and intensive stereoscopic sound fields in a listening room.
occurrence with very high quantization of audio signals. Due to the high determined based on the sampling rate, while the dynamic range
sampling rate, better audio quality can be achieved than that offered by the representing the sound level difference is determined by the number of Compressed Music Enhancer
PCM format used for normal audio CDs. The frequency is equal to or quantized bits. In principle, the higher the sampling frequency, the wider The Compressed Music Enhancer feature of this unit enhances your
higher than 100 kHz and the dynamic range is 120 dB. This unit can the range of frequencies that can be played back, and the higher the number listening experience by regenerating the missing harmonics in compression
transmit or receive DSD signals input from the HDMI jack. of quantized bits, the more finely the sound level can be reproduced. artifacts. As a result, it compensates for flattened complexity due to the loss
of high-frequency fidelity as well as lack of bass due to the loss of low-
FLAC WAV frequency bass, providing improved performance for the overall sound
This is a file format for lossless audio data compression. FLAC is inferior Windows standard audio file format, which defines the method of recording system.
to lossy compression formats in compression rate but provides higher audio the digital data obtained by converting audio signals. It does not specify the
quality. compression (coding) method so a desired compression method can be used SILENT CINEMA
with it. By default, it is compatible with the PCM method (no compression) Yamaha has developed a natural, realistic sound effect DSP algorithm for
MP3 headphones. Parameters for headphones have been set for each sound
and some compression methods including the ADPCM method.
One of the audio compression methods used by MPEG. It employs the program, so that accurate representations of all the sound programs can be
irreversible compression method, which achieves a high compression rate WMA enjoyed on headphones.
by thinning out the data of hardly audible part to the human ears. It is said An audio compression method developed by Microsoft Corporation. It
to be capable of compressing the data quantity by about 1/11 (128 kbps) employs the irreversible compression method, which achieves a high Virtual CINEMA DSP
while maintaining a similar audio quality to music CD. compression rate by thinning out the data of hardly audible part to the Yamaha has developed a Virtual CINEMA DSP algorithm that allows you
human ears. It is said to be capable of compressing the data quantity by to enjoy DSP surround effects even without any surround speakers, by
MPEG-4 AAC using virtual surround speakers. It is even possible to enjoy Virtual
about 1/22 (64 kbps) while maintaining a similar audio quality to music
An MPEG-4 audio standard. As it allows compression of data at a bit rate CINEMA DSP using a minimal two-speaker system that does not include a
CD.
lower than that of MPEG-2 AAC, it is used among others for mobile center speaker.
telephones, portable audio players and other low-capacity devices requiring
high sound quality. In addition to the above types of devices, MPEG-4
AAC is also used to distribute contents on the Internet, and as such is
supported by computers, media servers and many other devices.
En 140
APPENDIX Glossary
Video information Deep Color When used in combination with HDCP (High-bandwidth Digital Content
Protection), HDMI provides a secure audio/video interface that meets the
Deep Color refers to the use of various color depths in displays, up from the
24-bit depths in previous versions of the HDMI specification. This extra bit security requirements of content providers and system operators. For
Component video signal depth allows HDTVs and other displays go from millions of colors to further information on HDMI, visit the HDMI website at
With the component video signal system, the video signal is separated into billions of colors and eliminate on-screen color banding for smooth tonal “http://www.hdmi.org/.”
the Y signal for luminance and the PB and PR signals for chrominance. transitions and subtle gradations between colors. The increased contrast
Color can be reproduced more faithfully with this system because each of S-video signal
ratio can represent many times more shades of gray between black and
these signals is independent. The component signal is also called the “color With the S-video signal system, the video signal normally transmitted using
white. Also Deep Color increases the number of available colors within the
difference signal” because the luminance signal is subtracted from the color a pin cable is separated and transmitted as the Y signal for the luminance
boundaries defined by the RGB or YCbCr color space.
signal. A monitor with component input jacks is required in order to output and the C signal for the chrominance through the S-video cable. Using the
component signals. HDMI S-VIDEO jack eliminates video signal transmission loss and allows
HDMI (High-Definition Multimedia Interface) is the first industry recording and playback of even more beautiful images.
Composite video signal supported, uncompressed, all-digital audio/video interface. Providing an
With the composite video signal system, the video signal comprises the “x.v.Color”
interface between any sources (such as set-top boxes or AV receivers) and
three basic elements of a video picture: color, brightness and A color space standard supported by HDMI version 1.3. It is a more
audio/video monitor (such as digital television), HDMI supports standard,
synchronization data. A composite video jack on a video component extensive color space than sRGB, and allows the expression of colors that
enhanced or high-definition video as well as multichannel digital audio
transmits these three elements combined. could not be expressed before. While remaining compatible with the color
using a single cable. HDMI transmits all ATSC HDTV standards and
gamut of sRGB standards, “x.v.Color” expands the color space, and can
supports 8-channel digital audio, with bandwidth to spare to accommodate
thus produce more vivid, natural images. It is particularly effective for still
future enhancements and requirements.
pictures and computer graphics.
Compatibility of the input and output video signals

Analog-to-HDMI video conversion is performed according to resolution of video signals as shown below. Analog-to-analog video conversion is also possible when “Analog to Analog Conversion” is
set to “On” (☞p. 122).
✓: available conversion
S-VIDEO
HDMI output COMPONENT VIDEO output VIDEO output
output
Resolution 480i/576i 480p/576p 720p 1080i 1080p 480i/576i 480p/576p 720p 1080i 480i/576i 480i/576i
480i/576i ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓
480p/576p ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓
HDMI input 720p ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓
1080i ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓
1080p ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓
480i/576i ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓
COMPONENT 480p/576p ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓
VIDEO input 720p ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓
1080i ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓
S-VIDEO input 480i/576i ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓
VIDEO input 480i/576i ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓
En 141
APPENDIX
Information on HDMI™
■ HDMI signal compatibility
Audio signals
Audio signal types Audio signal formats Compatible media
2ch Linear PCM 2ch, 32-192 kHz, 16/20/24 bit CD, DVD-Video, DVD-Audio, etc.
Multi-ch Linear PCM 8ch, 32-192 kHz, 16/20/24 bit DVD-Audio, Blu-ray Disc, HD DVD,
etc.
DSD 2/5.1ch, 2.8224 MHz, 1 bit SACD, etc.
Bitstream Dolby Digital, DTS DVD-Video, etc.
Bitstream (High definition audio) Dolby TrueHD, Dolby Digital Plus, Blu-ray Disc, HD DVD, etc.
DTS-HD Master Audio, DTS-HD
High Resolution Audio, DTS Express
• If the input source component can decode the bitstream audio signals of audio commentaries, you can playback the audio
sources with the audio commentaries mixed down by using the digital audio input (optical or coaxial) connections.
• Refer to the supplied instruction manuals of the input source component, and set the component appropriately.
NOTES
• When CPPM copy-protected DVD-Audio is played back, video and audio signals may not be output,
depending on the type of the DVD player.
• This unit is not compatible with HDCP-incompatible HDMI or DVI components.
• Refer to the supplied instruction manuals for details.
To decode audio bitstream signals on this unit, set the input source component appropriately so that the
component outputs the bitstream audio signals directly (does not decode the bitstream signals on the
component).
• This unit is not compatible with the audio commentary features (for example, the special audio contents
downloaded via Internet) of Blu-ray Disc or HD DVD. This unit does not playback the audio
commentaries of the Blu-ray Disc or HD DVD content.
Video signals
This unit is compatible with the video signals of the following resolutions:
– 480i/60 Hz – 720p/60 Hz, 50 Hz
– 576i/50 Hz – 1080i/60 Hz, 50 Hz
– 480p/60 Hz – 1080p/60 Hz, 50 Hz, 24 Hz
– 576p/50 Hz
En 142
APPENDIX
About trademarks
Bluetooth™
Bluetooth is a registered trademark of the Bluetooth SIG and is used by Yamaha in accordance with a
Manufactured under license from Dolby Laboratories. Dolby, Pro Logic and the double-D symbol are license agreement.
trademarks of Dolby Laboratories.
Manufactured under license under U.S. Patent #’s: “HDMI,” the “HDMI” logo and “High-Definition Multimedia Interface” are trademarks, or registered
5,451,942; 5,956,674; 5,974,380; 5,978,762; 6,226,616; 6,487,535; 7,212,872; 7,333,929; 7,392,195; trademarks of HDMI Licensing LLC.
7,272,567 & other U.S. and worldwide patents issued & pending. DTS and the Symbol are registered
x.v.Color™
trademarks, & DTS-HD, DTS-HD Master Audio, and the DTS logos are trademarks of DTS, Inc.
“x.v.Color” is a trademark of Sony Corporation.
Product includes software. © DTS, Inc. All Rights Reserved.
iPod™, iPhone™
“iPod” is a trademark of Apple Inc., registered in the U.S. and other countries. “iPhone” is a trademark
of Apple Inc. “SILENT CINEMA” is a trademark of Yamaha Corporation.
Windows XP, Windows Vista, Windows 7, Windows Media Audio, Windows Media Connect and
Windows Media Player are either registered trademarks or trademarks of Microsoft Corporation in the
United States and/or other countries.
MPEG Layer-3 audio coding technology licensed from Fraunhofer IIS and Thomson.
This receiver supports network connections.
En 143
APPENDIX
Specifications
■ Input ■ HDMI ■ Remote
• Analog Audio • Input ............................................................. 8 (AV1-7, VIDEO AUX) • RS-232C .............................................................................................1
RCA ...............................................................................................10 • Output .........................................................................2 (HDMI OUT) • REMOTE IN.......................................................................................2
AV1-4, AUDIO1-4, PHONO, VIDEO AUX • HDMI Specification • REMOTE OUT...................................................................................2
MULTI CH INPUT...................................................................... 8ch Deep Color 30/36 bit, “x.v.Color,” Auto Lips Sync, HD Audio, • TRIGGER OUT ...................................... 2 (12 V/total 100 mA max.)
FRONT L/R, CENTER, SURROUND L/R, ARC (Audio Return Channel), 3D
SURROUND BACK L/R, SUBWOOFER ■ Compatible Decoding Format
• Audio Format
• Digital Audio • Decoding Format
Dolby Digital, DTS, DSD 6ch, Dolby Digital Plus, Dolby TrueHD,
Optical ...................................... 4 (AV3-4, AUDIO1, VIDEO AUX) DTS-HD, PCM 2ch-8ch Dolby TrueHD, Dolby Digital Plus, Dolby Digital,
Coaxial.............................................................. 3 (AV1-2, AUDIO2) Dolby Digital EX, DTS-HD Master Audio,
• Content Protection ..................................................HDCP compatible
• Analog Video DTS-HD High Resolution Audio, DTS Express, DTS,
■ Tuner DTS-ES Matrix 6.1, DTS-ES Discrete 6.1, DTS 96/24
Composite..................................................5 (AV1-4, VIDEO AUX)
• Analog Tuner • Post Decoding Format
S-video.......................................................5 (AV1-4, VIDEO AUX)
[China, Korea, Australia, Asia and General models] Dolby Pro Logic, Dolby Pro Logic II Music,
Component ........................................................................4 (AV1-4)
Dolby Pro Logic II Movie, Dolby Pro Logic II Game,
• Other FM/AM .......................................................................... 1 (TUNER)
Dolby Pro Logic IIx Music, Dolby Pro Logic IIx Movie,
DOCK.............................1 (Audio L/R, Composite Video, S-video) [Other models] Dolby Pro Logic IIx Game, DTS Neo:6 Music, DTS Neo:6 Cinema
■ Output FM/AM with Radio Data System .................................. 1 (TUNER)
■ Audio Section
• Analog Audio ■ Network • Minimum RMS Output Power (20 Hz to 20 kHz, 0.06% THD, 8 Ω)
SPEAKERS .................................................. 11ch (7ch + Extra 4ch) • USB (USB1.1 Full Speed) ................................................................. 1 FRONT L/R ............................................................. 130 W + 130 W
FRONT L/R, CENTER, SURROUND L/R, Device Type..................................... USB Mass Storage Class, MTP CENTER................................................................................. 130 W
SURROUND BACK/BI-AMP L/R, Audio Format ................ MP3, WMA, WAV, MPEG-4 AAC, FLAC SURROUND L/R .................................................... 130 W + 130 W
EXTRA SP1 (ZONE2/ZONE3/F.PRESENCE L/R),
EXTRA SP2 (ZONE2/ZONE3 L/R) Max Audio Support fs................................................. 48 kHz/24 bit SURROUND BACK L/R ....................................................... 130 W
PRE OUT..................................................................................... 9ch Cover Art Format ........................................................... PNG, JPEG
• Dynamic Power (IHF)
FRONT L/R, CENTER, SURROUND L/R, • Ethernet (100Base-TX/10Base-TX) .................................................. 1 [China, Korea, Asia and General models]
SURROUND BACK L/R, SUBWOOFER Internet Radio FRONT L/R, 8/6/4/2 Ω......................................165/210/285/405 W
(Stereo, Front & Rear 2ch) Audio Format.............................................................. MP3, WMA
AV OUT...........................................................................................1 • Maximum Effective Output Power (JEITA)
PC Server
ZONE OUT .....................................................................................1 [China, Korea, Asia and General models]
Audio Format.............. MP3, WMA, WAV, MPEG-4 AAC, FLAC
ZONE3 OUT ................................................................................... 1 1 kHz, 10% THD, 8 Ω ............................................................ 190 W
Max Audio Support fs .............................................. 96 kHz/24 bit
• Digital Audio • Maximum Output Power [U.K. and Europe models]
Cover Art Format......................................................... PNG, JPEG
Optical ...........................................................................1 (AV OUT) 1 kHz, 0.7% THD, 4 Ω ........................................................... 190 W
DLNA
• Analog Video Version................................................1.5 (DMP & DMR support) • IEC Output Power [U.K. and Europe models]
MONITOR OUT/ZONE OUT Audio Format.............. MP3, WMA, WAV, MPEG-4 AAC, FLAC FRONT L/R 1 kHz, 0.9% THD, 8 Ω......................... 135 W+135 W
Composite .....................................................................................1 Max Audio Support fs .............................................. 96 kHz/24 bit • Dynamic Headroom
S-video .......................................................................................... 1 [China, Korea, Asia and General models]
Cover Art Format......................................................... PNG, JPEG
Component....................................................................................1 8 Ω .......................................................................................... 1.0 dB
Network Control
AV OUT
Web Browser Control, MusicCAST2 Commander Support, • Damping Factor
Composite .....................................................................................1 Yamaha Network Control Support (YNC), Receiver Manager FRONT L/R, 1 kHz, 8 Ω ............................................... 150 or more
S-video .......................................................................................... 1 Support
En 144
APPENDIX Specifications
• Input Sensitivity/Input Impedance • Tone Control Characteristics ■ FM Section
PHONO ......................................................................3.5 mV/47 kΩ Main Zone (FRONT, CENTER, SUBWOOFER) • Tuning Range
AUDIO2 etc...............................................................200 mV/47 kΩ Bass Boost/Cut ...........................................................±6 dB/50 Hz [Asia and General models]......... 87.5/87.50 to 108.0/108.00 MHz
MULTI CH IN ...........................................................200 mV/47 kΩ Bass Turnover Frequency ....................................................350 Hz [Other models] ............................................. 87.50 to 108.00 MHz
• Maximum Input Level Treble Boost/Cut.......................................................±6 dB/20 kHz
• 50 dB Quieting Sensitivity (IHF)
PHONO (1 kHz, 0.1% THD) ................................... 60 mV or more Treble Turnover Frequency ................................................3.5 kHz
Mono..................................................................... 3.0 µV (20.8 dBf)
AUDIO2 etc. (1 kHz, 0.5% THD) .............................. 2.4 V or more Zone2, Zone3
• Signal to Noise Ration (IHF)
• Output Level/Output Impedance Bass Boost/Cut .......................................................±10 dB/100 Hz
Mono/Stereo ................................................................. 74 dB/70 dB
AV OUT....................................................................200 mV/1.2 kΩ Bass Turnover Frequency ....................................................350 Hz
Treble Boost/Cut.....................................................±10 dB/10 kHz • Harmonic Distortion (1 kHz)
HEADPHONE OUT .................................................150 mV/100 Ω
Treble Turnover Frequency ................................................3.5 kHz Mono/Stereo .................................................................... 0.3%/0.3%
PRE OUT......................................................................1.0 V/1.2 kΩ
• Filter Characteristics (fc=40/60/80/90/100/110/120/160/200 Hz) • Antenna Input .........................................................75 Ω (unbalanced)
ZONE2 OUT ................................................................1.0 V/1.2 kΩ
ZONE3 OUT ................................................................1.0 V/1.2 kΩ H.P.F. (FRONT, CENTER, SURROUND, SURROUND BACK: ■ AM Section
Small) ................................................................................12 dB/oct.
• Frequency Response • Tuning Range
L.P.F. (SUBWOOFER) .....................................................24 dB/oct.
AUDIO2 etc. to FRONT L/R [Asia and General models]...................530/531 to 1710/1611 kHz
(Pure Direct, 10 Hz to 100 kHz)..........................................+0/-3 dB ■ Video Section [Other models] ..................................................... 531 to 1611 kHz
• Total Harmonic Distortion • Video Format (MONITOR OUT/ZONE OUT, Wall Paper/OSD) ■ General
PHONO to AV OUT (20 Hz to 20 kHz, 1 V).............. 0.02% or less [Korea and General models].........................................NTSC/PAL
• Power Supply
AV1 to FRONT L/R (20 Hz to 20 kHz, 65 W/8 Ω)..... 0.04% or less [Other models]..............................................................PAL/NTSC
[General models]...................... AC 110-120/220-240 V, 50/60 Hz
• Signal to Noise Ratio (IHF-A Network) • Video Signal Type (Video Conversion) .............................NTSC/PAL
[China model] ..................................................... AC 220 V, 50 Hz
PHONO (input shorted, 5 mV) to AV OUT • Signal Level [Korea model] ..................................................... AC 220 V, 60 Hz
[China, Korea, Asia and General models] ..................86 dB or more Composite ..................................................................... 1 Vp-p/75 Ω [Australia model] ................................................ AC 240 V, 50 Hz
[Other models]............................................................81 dB or more S-video [U.K. and Europe models] .................................. AC 220 V, 50 Hz
AUDIO2 etc. (input shorted, 250 mV) to FRONT L/R - NTSC................................1 Vp-p/75 Ω (Y), 0.286 Vp-p/75 Ω (C) [Asia models] ..........................................AC 220-240 V, 50/60 Hz
..................................................................................100 dB or more
- PAL .......................................1 Vp-p/75 Ω (Y), 0.3 Vp-p/75 Ω (C)
• Power Consumption .................................................................. 490 W
• Residual Noise (IHF-A Network) Component ...................... 1 Vp-p/75 Ω (Y), 0.7 Vp-p/75 Ω (PB/PR)
FRONT L/R ................................................................150 µV or less • Standby Power Consumption
• Maximum Input Level (Video Conversion Off) .......1.5 Vp-p or more
HDMI Control Off/Standby Through Off.....................0.3 W or less
• Channel Separation (1 kHz/10 kHz)
• Signal to Noise Ratio (Video Conversion Off) ............. 60 dB or more HDMI Control On/Standby Through On.................. 2.7 W (typical)
PHONO (input shorted)................................... 60 dB/55 dB or more
• Frequency Response (Video Conversion Off) NET Standby On....................................................... 4.5 W (typical)
AV1 etc. (input 5.1 kΩ shorted)....................... 60 dB/45 dB or more
Component • Dimensions (W x H x D)
• Volume Control (MONITOR OUT/ZONE OUT) ............... 5 Hz to 100 MHz, ±3 dB ............................... 435 x 182 x 430 mm (17-1/8 x 7-1/8 x 16-7/8 in)
Main Zone ................................................... MUTE/-80 to +16.5 dB
• Weight..................................................................... 16.0 kg (35.3 lbs.)
Zone2, Zone3............................................... MUTE/-80 to +16.5 dB
En 145
APPENDIX
Index
Numerics Center Level, Sound Program menu ........................................... 90 E
Center speaker............................................................................. 15
2ch stereo playback...................................................................... 52 Enhancer, Input menu.................................................................. 83
Center Width, Sound Program menu .......................................... 91
5 channel speaker layout .............................................................. 18 ERASE ...................................................................................... 119
Changing speaker impedance...................................................... 21
5.1-channel speaker layout........................................................... 17 Extended Surround, Option menu ............................................... 59
CINEMA DSP 3D mode............................................................. 51
7.1-channel speaker connection ................................................... 20 External component connection .................................................. 26
CINEMA DSP 3D Mode, Option menu ..................................... 59
7.1-channel speaker layout........................................................... 16 External decoder connection ....................................................... 35
CINEMA DSP indicator ............................................................. 11
CINEMA DSP parameters .......................................................... 88
A CLEAR...................................................................................... 118
F
Adaptive DRC, Option menu....................................................... 59 Clear All Preset ........................................................................... 65 Features of Web Control Center.................................................. 79
Adaptive DSP Level, Sound setup............................................... 98 Clear Preset ................................................................................. 65 FIRM UPDATE, Advanced Setup menu .................................. 124
Advanced Setup menu ............................................................... 121 Close, DOCK (iPod) ................................................................... 74 FM antenna connection ............................................................... 39
Advanced speaker configuration.................................................. 23 COAXIAL jack ........................................................................... 26 FM Mode..................................................................................... 64
AM antenna connection ............................................................... 39 COMPONENT VIDEO jack....................................................... 26 FM tuning .................................................................................... 62
AM tuning.................................................................................... 62 Compressed Music Enhancer...................................................... 52 Front panel..................................................................................... 8
Analog to Analog Conversion, Video setup ................................ 99 Configuration, Manual Setup, Speaker setup.............................. 94 Front panel display ...................................................................... 11
ARC (Audio Return Channel), HDMI setup ............................. 101 Connect, Option menu ................................................................ 60 Front Presence L Level, Sound Program menu........................... 90
Aspect, Processing, Video setup ................................................ 100 Connecting speakers.................................................................... 20 Front Presence R Level, Sound Program menu .......................... 91
AUDIO jack ................................................................................. 26 Connecting to network ................................................................ 37 Front speaker ............................................................................... 15
Audio Output, HDMI setup ....................................................... 102 Connecting USB storage device.................................................. 38 Function setup ........................................................................... 105
Audio Return Channel function ................................................. 127 Connections................................................................................. 15
Audio Select, Option menu.......................................................... 60 Content window .......................................................................... 61 H
Audio Signal, Information menu ............................................... 109 Control Select, HDMI setup...................................................... 101 HDMI Control function............................................................. 125
Auto Power Down, Function setup ............................................ 106 Controlling Zone2 or Zone3...................................................... 131 HDMI Control, HDMI setup ..................................................... 101
Auto Preset................................................................................... 65 Cursor indicators ......................................................................... 11 HDMI indicator ........................................................................... 11
Auto Setup, Speaker setup ........................................................... 93 HDMI jack................................................................................... 26
D HDMI Monitor, Information menu ........................................... 109
B HDMI setup............................................................................... 100
Decode Type, Sound Program menu .................................... 90, 91
Basic playback ............................................................................. 47 Decoder Mode, Input menu......................................................... 83 High-frequency sound adjustment............................................... 48
BD player connection .................................................................. 30 Dialogue Lift, Option menu ........................................................ 59
Bi-amp connection, speaker......................................................... 21 Dimension, Sound Program menu .............................................. 91 I
Bluetooth™ component playback................................................ 77 Direct, Sound Program menu...................................................... 90 Information menu ...................................................................... 109
Bookmark Off, Internet Radio ..................................................... 70 Disconnect, Option menu............................................................ 60 Initial Delay, Sound Program menu ............................................ 88
Bookmark On, Internet Radio...................................................... 70 Display Set, Function setup....................................................... 107 Initial Volume, Sound setup........................................................ 98
Browse view................................................................................. 61 Distance, Speaker setup .............................................................. 96 INITIALIZE, Advanced Setup menu........................................ 123
DMC Control, Input menu .......................................................... 83 Input Assignment, Function setup............................................. 106
C DSP Level, Sound Program menu .............................................. 88 Input menu................................................................................... 81
Cable plug .................................................................................... 26 DVD player connection............................................................... 30 Input menu list............................................................................. 82
Center Image, Sound Program menu ........................................... 91 Dynamic Range, Sound setup ..................................................... 98 Internet Radio .............................................................................. 70
En 146
APPENDIX Index
IP Address, Network setup ........................................................ 103 Network, Information menu...................................................... 110 Remote control battery installation ............................................. 13
iPhone™ playback ....................................................................... 73 Normal tuning ............................................................................. 62 Remote control connection.......................................................... 36
iPod Interlock, Input menu .......................................................... 83 Now Playing view ....................................................................... 61 Remote control, Controlling other components ........................ 111
iPod™ playback........................................................................... 73 REMOTE SENSOR, Advanced Setup menu ............................ 121
O RENAME .................................................................................. 116
J ON SCREEN menu..................................................................... 55 Rename/Icon Select, Input menu................................................. 82
Jack .............................................................................................. 26 On-screen display........................................................................ 14 Rename/Icon Select, Scene menu ............................................... 86
OPTICAL jack ............................................................................ 26 Repeat, Option menu................................................................... 60
L Option menu................................................................................ 57 Reset, Scene menu....................................................................... 86
Option menu list.......................................................................... 58 Resolution, Processing, Video setup ........................................... 99
Language.................................................................................... 108 Reverb Delay, Sound Program menu .......................................... 89
LEARN ...................................................................................... 114 Reverb Level, Sound Program menu .......................................... 90
Level, Speaker setup .................................................................... 96
P
Reverb Time, Sound Program menu ........................................... 89
Lipsync, Sound setup ................................................................... 97 Pairing, Option menu .................................................................. 60 Room Size, Sound Program menu .............................................. 88
Liveness, Sound Program menu .................................................. 89 Panorama, Sound Program menu................................................ 91
Load, Scene menu........................................................................ 85 Parametric EQ, Speaker setup..................................................... 96 S
Low-frequency sound adjustment................................................ 48 Party mode ................................................................................ 131
Party Mode Set, Multi Zone setup ............................................ 104 Save, Scene menu........................................................................ 85
M PC................................................................................................ 66 SCENE function .......................................................................... 49
PHONES jack................................................................................ 9 Scene menu.................................................................................. 84
MAC Address Filter, Network setup ......................................... 103 Setting Data Copy, Manual Setup, Speaker setup....................... 93
MACRO..................................................................................... 117 Play Control, DOCK (iPod) ........................................................ 75
Play Control, Internet Radio ....................................................... 71 Setting Pattern, Manual Setup, Speaker setup............................. 93
Manual Preset............................................................................... 63 Setup menu .................................................................................. 92
Manual Setup, Speaker setup....................................................... 93 Play Control, PC.......................................................................... 67
Play Control, USB....................................................................... 69 Setup menu list ............................................................................ 93
Manual Tuning, TUNER ............................................................. 64 Shortcut function ......................................................................... 72
Max Volume, Sound setup........................................................... 98 Power Amp Assign, Manual Setup, Speaker setup..................... 94
PREOUT connection................................................................... 25 Shuffle, Option menu .................................................................. 60
Memory Guard, Function setup ................................................. 108 SILENT CINEMA mode............................................................. 50
Menu browse control ................................................................... 74 Presence speaker ......................................................................... 15
Presence speaker connection....................................................... 20 Simple remote control ................................................................. 75
MONITOR CHECK, Advanced Setup menu ............................ 123 Simplified remote control.......................................................... 120
Monitor Out Assign, Multi Zone setup...................................... 104 Presence speaker layout .............................................................. 17
PRESET .................................................................................... 113 Sound program ............................................................................ 50
Multi information display ............................................................ 11 Sound program list ...................................................................... 53
Multi Zone setup ........................................................................ 104 Preset Select, TUNER................................................................. 64
Pure Direct Mode ........................................................................ 52 Sound Program menu .................................................................. 87
Multi-format player connection ................................................... 35 Sound setup ................................................................................. 97
Multi-zone function ................................................................... 129 Pure Direct Mode, Sound setup .................................................. 98
Speaker connection...................................................................... 15
MUTE indicator ........................................................................... 11 SPEAKER IMP., Advanced Setup menu.................................. 121
R
Speaker indicators ....................................................................... 11
N Rear panel.................................................................................... 10 Speaker layout ....................................................................... 16, 23
Network connection ..................................................................... 37 Recording device connection ...................................................... 37 Speaker setting ............................................................................ 40
NETWORK port .......................................................................... 37 RECOV./BACKUP, Advanced Setup menu............................. 123 Speaker setup............................................................................... 93
Network setup ............................................................................ 103 Registering remote control codes.............................................. 113 Standby Charge, Input menu ....................................................... 83
Network Standby, Network setup .............................................. 103 REMOTE CON AMP, Advanced Setup menu ......................... 122 Standby Through, HDMI setup ................................................. 102
Remote control ............................................................................ 12
En 147
APPENDIX Index
Straight decoding mode ............................................................... 51 VIDEO jack................................................................................. 26
Subwoofer .................................................................................... 15 Video Out, Input menu................................................................ 83
Supplied accessories ...................................................................... 2 Video setup.................................................................................. 99
Surround Back Initial Delay, Sound Program menu ................... 88 Video Signal, Information menu............................................... 109
Surround Back L Level, Sound Program menu ........................... 90 Virtual CINEMA DSP 3D mode................................................. 51
Surround Back Liveness, Sound Program menu ......................... 89 Virtual CINEMA DSP mode ...................................................... 50
Surround Back R Level, Sound Program menu........................... 90 VOLTAGE SELECTOR............................................................. 10
Surround Back Room Size, Sound Program menu...................... 88 VOLUME...................................................................................... 8
Surround back speaker ................................................................. 15 VOLUME indicator .................................................................... 11
Surround Initial Delay, Sound Program menu............................. 88 Volume Trim, Option menu........................................................ 60
Surround L Level, Sound Program menu .................................... 90
Surround Liveness, Sound Program menu................................... 89 W
Surround R Level, Sound Program menu .................................... 90 Web Control Center .................................................................... 79
Surround Room Size, Sound Program menu ............................... 88
Surround speaker ......................................................................... 15 Y
S-VIDEO jack.............................................................................. 26
System, Information menu......................................................... 110 YPAO.......................................................................................... 40
T Z
Test Tone, Speaker setup ............................................................. 97 ZONE OUT connection .............................................................. 25
Tone control ................................................................................. 48 Zone Rename, Multi Zone setup............................................... 105
Tone Control, Option menu ......................................................... 59 Zone, Information menu............................................................ 110
Transmitter of the Wireless System for iPod............................... 75 Zone2 Scene Rename, Multi Zone setup .................................. 105
Trigger connection ....................................................................... 36 Zone2 Set, Multi Zone setup..................................................... 104
Trigger Output, Function setup.................................................. 107 Zone3 Set, Multi Zone setup..................................................... 104
TU, Advanced Setup menu ........................................................ 122
Tuner indicator............................................................................. 11
TV Audio Input, HDMI setup.................................................... 101
TV FORMAT, Advanced Setup menu ...................................... 122
TV monitor connection ................................................................ 27
U
USB port ...................................................................................... 38
USB storage device connection ................................................... 38
USB storage devices .................................................................... 68
Utility, TUNER............................................................................ 64
V
VERSION, Advanced Setup menu ............................................ 124
Video Adjustment, Option menu ................................................. 60
En 148
© 2010 Yamaha Corporation YC599A0/OMEN1

RXV 2067

Uploaded by

Copyright:

Available Formats

RXV 2067

Uploaded by

Document Information

Original Title

Copyright

Available Formats

Share this document

Share or Embed Document

Sharing Options

Did you find this document useful?

Is this content inappropriate?

Copyright:

Available Formats

RXV 2067

Uploaded by

Copyright:

Available Formats

Owner’s Manual

AV Receiver English for Asia, Africa, Oceania

3 4 This procedure allows you to select the language of

• “hON SCREEN” (example) indicates the name of

the page. (French), (German), (Spanish),

■ Automatic setup for speaker acoustic parameters ■ Customizable remote control

■ 1-button input/sound program/setting switching (SCENE function) ...................49

■ Playback and control via network

■ Enable listening in multiple rooms (multi-zone function)

Front panel c Front panel display

EXTRA SP2 SINGLE EXTRA SP1

Front panel display i CINEMA DSP indicator n ADAPTIVE DRC indicator

STEREO TUNED PARTY MUTE VOLUME

J 1 : “SB” is displayed when using a 6.1-channel configuration only.

Remote control a Remote control signal transmitter i Cursor B / C / D / E, ENTER, RETURN

b l d Input selector j PRESET F / G

1 2 3 4 AUDIO1-4 AUDIO1-4 jacks l RECEIVER A (RECEIVER Power)

MOVIE STEREO STRAIGHT

Remote control with the cover open s Sound selection keys

ENTER 120min. 90min. NOTE

The following displays are available in the on-screen display.

Configure the optional settings for each input

Speaker layout ■ Enjoying the 7.1 channel audio source

CENTER jack Center speaker SUBWOOFER Subwoofer

SURROUND jacks Surround L/R speakers

■ Assigning a speaker configuration

Power Amp Assign 7ch Normal (Default)

Center speaker Center speaker

■ Assigning a speaker configuration

Power Amp Assign 7ch Normal (Default)

Center speaker Front L speaker

■ Assigning a speaker configuration

Power Amp Assign 7ch + 1ZONE

Connecting speakers and subwoofers

HDMI RS-232C RS-232C

URROUND SUR. BACK SUBWOOFER ZONE 2 ZONE 3

Switch this unit to the standby mode.

ARC SELECTABLE ARC (1 BD/DVD)

AV 1 AV 2 AV 3 AV 4 COMPONENT VIDEO TRIGGER

DOCK NETWORK HDMI RS-232C

EXTRA SP2 SINGLE EXTRA SP1

■ Connecting the subwoofers

Switch this unit to the standby mode, and then

■ Connecting speakers Set the subwoofer volume as follows.

• Surround L/R speakers VOLUME

J 1 : When only one subwoofer is used, connect the subwoofer to the

■ Assigning a speaker configuration ■ Assigning a speaker configuration ■ Assigning a speaker configuration

■ Using front speakers that support bi-amp Connecting an external amplifier 1

connection, surround back speakers and Y

+12V 0.1A MAX.

■ 9.1-channel speaker layout

ZONE OUT terminals of this unit.

■ Assigning a speaker configuration

Jacks and cables S-VIDEO jacks VIDEO jacks

■ Audio/Video jacks S-video cable AV 1 Video pin cable

■ Analog video jacks AUDIO jacks

Component video pin cable Stereo pin cable

Connecting a TV monitor When connecting to a non-HDMI compatible TV

S-VIDEO jack AUDIO 1